WO2020218057A1 - Connection device - Google Patents

Connection device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020218057A1
WO2020218057A1 PCT/JP2020/016273 JP2020016273W WO2020218057A1 WO 2020218057 A1 WO2020218057 A1 WO 2020218057A1 JP 2020016273 W JP2020016273 W JP 2020016273W WO 2020218057 A1 WO2020218057 A1 WO 2020218057A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
elastic member
state
pair
operation unit
case
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2020/016273
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
祐輝 川瀬
飯田 正和
Original Assignee
Idec株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2019084138A external-priority patent/JP2020181716A/en
Priority claimed from JP2019084137A external-priority patent/JP2020181715A/en
Priority claimed from JP2019084136A external-priority patent/JP2020181714A/en
Priority claimed from JP2019084135A external-priority patent/JP7368100B2/en
Application filed by Idec株式会社 filed Critical Idec株式会社
Publication of WO2020218057A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020218057A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01HELECTRIC SWITCHES; RELAYS; SELECTORS; EMERGENCY PROTECTIVE DEVICES
    • H01H9/00Details of switching devices, not covered by groups H01H1/00 - H01H7/00
    • H01H9/02Bases, casings, or covers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01RELECTRICALLY-CONDUCTIVE CONNECTIONS; STRUCTURAL ASSOCIATIONS OF A PLURALITY OF MUTUALLY-INSULATED ELECTRICAL CONNECTING ELEMENTS; COUPLING DEVICES; CURRENT COLLECTORS
    • H01R24/00Two-part coupling devices, or either of their cooperating parts, characterised by their overall structure
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01RELECTRICALLY-CONDUCTIVE CONNECTIONS; STRUCTURAL ASSOCIATIONS OF A PLURALITY OF MUTUALLY-INSULATED ELECTRICAL CONNECTING ELEMENTS; COUPLING DEVICES; CURRENT COLLECTORS
    • H01R4/00Electrically-conductive connections between two or more conductive members in direct contact, i.e. touching one another; Means for effecting or maintaining such contact; Electrically-conductive connections having two or more spaced connecting locations for conductors and using contact members penetrating insulation
    • H01R4/28Clamped connections, spring connections
    • H01R4/48Clamped connections, spring connections utilising a spring, clip, or other resilient member
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01RELECTRICALLY-CONDUCTIVE CONNECTIONS; STRUCTURAL ASSOCIATIONS OF A PLURALITY OF MUTUALLY-INSULATED ELECTRICAL CONNECTING ELEMENTS; COUPLING DEVICES; CURRENT COLLECTORS
    • H01R4/00Electrically-conductive connections between two or more conductive members in direct contact, i.e. touching one another; Means for effecting or maintaining such contact; Electrically-conductive connections having two or more spaced connecting locations for conductors and using contact members penetrating insulation
    • H01R4/28Clamped connections, spring connections
    • H01R4/50Clamped connections, spring connections utilising a cam, wedge, cone or ball also combined with a screw

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a connecting device to which an electric wire is connected.
  • the present application claims the benefit of priority from Japanese patent applications JP2019-084135, JP2019-08413, JP2019-084337, and JP2019-0843138 filed on April 25, 2019, and all of these applications. The disclosure is incorporated herein by reference.
  • connection devices Conventionally, so-called push-in type connecting devices have been used as connecting devices to which electric wires are connected in control panels and the like.
  • the connection device when the electric wire is inserted into the insertion hole of the case, the electric wire is pressed against the conduction terminal by the leaf spring provided in the case and electrically connected.
  • connection device of Document 3 a screwdriver or the like is reinserted into the case in order to return the operation unit locked to the case to the original position and sandwich the electric wire between the elastic member and the conductive terminal. It is necessary to change the position of the operation unit to release the lock with the case. That is, in order to connect the electric wire to the connected device, it is necessary to insert the driver or the like into the case twice, which may complicate the operation procedure of the connected device.
  • the present invention is directed to a connecting device to which an electric wire is connected, and an object of the present invention is to reduce the force of maintaining the operation unit in a pushed state.
  • the connecting device includes a case, a conductive terminal portion fixed to the case, and an elastic member attached to the case and pressing an electric wire against the terminal portion by a restoring force to hold the electric wire. And an operation unit that changes the shape of the elastic member by moving along a moving path extending in the vertical direction provided in the case.
  • the elastic member has a connection state in which the electric wire is sandwiched between the electric wire and the terminal portion and a non-connection state in which the electric wire is released from being sandwiched between the terminal portion by bending more than the connection state. It can be transformed between.
  • the operation unit comes into contact with the elastic member in the connected state at the first position, and is pushed to the second position below the first position while maintaining the contact state with the elastic member.
  • the elastic member is deformed into the unconnected state.
  • the connected device further includes a holding force reducing mechanism that reduces the force for maintaining the operating unit in a state of being pushed into the case when the operating unit is located at the second position. According to the connected device, it is possible to reduce the force for maintaining the operation unit in the pushed state.
  • the operating portion has a first inclined surface that inclines in a direction away from the center line of the moving path as it goes downward.
  • the case has a second inclined surface that is inclined in the vertical direction in parallel with the first inclined surface in the movement path.
  • the holding force reducing mechanism includes the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface. In the state where the operating portion is located at the first position, the first inclined surface is located at a position separated upward from the second inclined surface. In the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the first inclined surface comes into contact with the second inclined surface from below.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member in the non-connected state presses the first inclined surface upward with respect to the second inclined surface, and the second inclined surface partially satisfies the restoring force of the elastic member.
  • the first inclined surface is provided at the upper end of the operating portion.
  • the first inclined surface is provided below the upper end portion of the operating portion.
  • one of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface has a convex portion
  • the other surface of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface has the operating portion the first. It has a concave portion that fits with the convex portion in a state of being located at two positions.
  • At least one of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface has a rough surface portion.
  • the elastic member is a leaf spring.
  • the elastic member is a leaf spring including a bent portion located at the upper end and a pair of arm portions extending downward on both left and right sides of the bent portion and increasing the distance in the left-right direction toward the lower end.
  • the operation unit includes a pair of pressing units that are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction and extend in the vertical direction, and the distance in the left-right direction becomes smaller toward the upper side, or the distance in the left-right direction is constant.
  • the holding force reducing mechanism includes the pair of arms and the pair of pressing portions. In the state where the operating portion is located at the first position, the lower end portion of at least one of the pair of pressing portions contacts the outer surface of at least one of the pair of arm portions. In the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the pair of arm portions are sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions in a state of being bent in a direction approaching each other in the left-right direction.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member in the non-connected state presses the inner side surfaces of the pair of pressing portions in the left-right direction by the pair of arms, and the pair of pressing portions exerts the restoring force of the elastic member. Partially support.
  • one of the pair of pressing portions and the pair of arms has a convex portion
  • the other of the pair of pressing portions and the pair of arms has the operating portion located at the second position. It has a concave portion that fits with the convex portion in the state of being
  • At least one of the inner side surfaces of the pair of pressing portions and the outer surfaces of the pair of arm portions has a rough surface portion.
  • the angle formed by the pair of arms is larger than 0 ° and smaller than 180 °.
  • the lower ends of the pair of arms are located below the lower ends of the pair of pressing portions.
  • the elastic member includes a fixed portion fixed to the case and a movable portion extending obliquely downward from the fixed portion.
  • the operating portion contacts the movable portion, and the movable portion sandwiches the electric wire with the terminal portion.
  • the movable portion bends downward from the connected state.
  • the case is arranged below the movable portion of the elastic member in the connected state, separated in a thickness direction perpendicular to the movable region of the movable portion, extends in the vertical direction, and moves downward. It is provided with a pair of pressing portions in which the interval in the thickness direction decreases accordingly.
  • the holding force reducing mechanism includes the movable portion of the elastic member and the pair of pressing portions. In the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the movable portion is sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions, and the restoring force of the elastic member is applied between the movable portion and the pair of pressing portions. Friction resistance to resist occurs.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member in the unconnected state is larger than the frictional resistance.
  • one of the movable portion and the pair of pressing portions has a convex portion
  • the other of the movable portion and the pair of pressing portions has the operating portion located at the second position. It has a concave part that fits with the convex part.
  • At least one of the inner side surfaces of the pair of pressing portions and both side surfaces of the movable portion in the thickness direction has a rough surface portion.
  • the elastic member is a leaf spring.
  • the elastic member is a leaf spring.
  • the connecting device further includes an inclined contact surface that extends diagonally upward toward the lower end of the movable portion as it goes upward at a position that is separated downward from the movable portion of the elastic member in the connected state.
  • the holding force reducing mechanism includes the movable portion of the elastic member and the inclined contact surface. In the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the lower end portion of the movable portion comes into contact with the inclined contact surface, and the restoring force of the elastic member is applied between the movable portion and the inclined contact surface. Friction resistance to resist occurs.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member in the unconnected state is larger than the frictional resistance.
  • the lower end of the movable portion fits with the recess in a state where the inclined contact surface has a recess and the operating portion is located at the second position.
  • the region of the inclined contact surface that comes into contact with the lower end portion of the movable portion, or the lower end portion of the movable portion has a rough surface portion.
  • connection device which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. It is an exploded perspective view of the connected device. It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of the connection device which concerns on 2nd Embodiment enlarged. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. It is a perspective view of the connection device which concerns on 3rd Embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the connecting device 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the connected device 1.
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the connecting device 1 cut at the positions III-III in FIG.
  • FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the connected device 1.
  • the connecting device 1 is a push-in type connecting device to which the electric wire 91 is connected.
  • the connecting device 1 is used, for example, as a terminal block such as a control panel.
  • a thin plate-shaped end plate 11 is attached to the front side of the connecting device 1.
  • a state in which a plurality of connected devices 1 are connected is shown by a two-dot chain line. 2 to 4 show a state in which the electric wire 91 is not inserted into the connecting device 1.
  • FIG. 2 the configuration on the back side of the cross section is also shown.
  • FIG. 2 shows a cross section of the connected device 1 at substantially the center in the thickness direction.
  • the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the thickness direction do not necessarily have to coincide with the mounting direction when the connecting device 1 is used. Further, the vertical direction does not necessarily have to coincide with the direction of gravity.
  • the connecting device 1 includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5.
  • the case 2 houses the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 inside.
  • the case 2 is made of resin, for example.
  • the case 2 is provided with two insertion holes 21 into which electric wires can be inserted.
  • two terminal portions 3, two elastic members 4, and two operating portions 5 are housed inside the case 2, two terminal portions 3, two elastic members 4, and two operating portions 5 are housed.
  • the connecting device 1 includes two sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5.
  • the connecting device 1 may include one set or three or more sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4, and an operation portion 5.
  • Each set of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 is arranged corresponding to the insertion hole 21.
  • the two sets of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 have the same shape and size, and are arranged in opposite directions. Focusing on the insertion hole 21 on the right side in FIG. 2, the terminal portion 3 is located on the right side of the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21 and extends downward from the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21.
  • the elastic member 4 extends from the lower end of the insertion hole 21 to the left side and further downward.
  • the operation unit 5 is arranged on the left side of the insertion hole 21 and above the elastic member 4.
  • the terminal portion 3 is a conductive member fixed to the case 2.
  • the terminal portion 3 is made of metal, for example.
  • the right terminal portion 3 in FIG. 2 is electrically connected to the left terminal portion 3 in FIG.
  • the two terminal portions 3 are one connected member. Specifically, the lower ends of the two terminal portions 3 are connected by a conductive terminal connecting portion 32 extending in the left-right direction.
  • the elastic member 4 is an elastically deformable member attached to the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4 is a substantially strip-shaped leaf spring.
  • the elastic member 4 is made of metal, for example.
  • the elastic member 4 may be formed of a conductive material or an insulating material such as a resin.
  • the elastic member 4 has, for example, a shape that is bent into a substantially L-shape, a substantially V-shape, or a substantially U-shape at the central portion 41 in the longitudinal direction.
  • the elastic member 4 is attached to the case 2 with both ends facing substantially downward by sandwiching the central portion 41 between the cases 2.
  • the portion 22 of the case 2 that contacts the central portion 41 from below is referred to as a “support portion 22”.
  • the support portion 22 extends substantially downward from the central portion 41 of the elastic member 4.
  • the portion 42 of the elastic member 4 extending from the central portion 41 to the left side of the support portion 22 is sandwiched between the support portion 22 and another portion of the case 2. Therefore, it is fixed to the case 2.
  • the portion 43 extending from the central portion 41 to the right side of the support portion 22 is in contact with the terminal portion 3 extending in the vertical direction.
  • the portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the operating portion 5, it elastically deforms with the upper end portion of the support portion 22 as a fulcrum and bends downward. Further, when the downward pressing force on the portion 43 disappears, the portion 43 returns to its original state (that is, elastically returns) due to the restoring force.
  • the portion 42 and the portion 43 of the elastic member 4 will be referred to as a "fixed portion 42” and a “movable portion 43", respectively.
  • the fixed portion 42 and the movable portion 43 are substantially line-symmetrical with respect to the center line passing through the central portion 41.
  • the movable portion 43 extends obliquely downward from the upper end of the fixed portion 42.
  • the insertion hole closed state is a state before the electric wire is inserted into the insertion hole 21, that is, an initial state before the connecting device 1 is used.
  • the elastic member 4 in the insertion hole closed state (that is, the initial state) is slightly bent in the direction in which the fixed portion 42 and the movable portion 43 approach each other. This makes it possible to prevent the elastic member 4 from falling off from the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4 in a state without bending is shown by a chain double-dashed line.
  • the support portion 22 of the case 2 serves as a stopper that limits the bending of the elastic member 4 (that is, the bending of the elastic member 4) in the direction in which the fixed portion 42 and the movable portion 43 approach each other. Fulfill.
  • the operation unit 5 is a substantially columnar or substantially plate-shaped member extending in the vertical direction.
  • the operation unit 5 is located inside a hole portion (hereinafter, referred to as “movement path 24”) extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2.
  • the operation unit 5 can move in the vertical direction along the movement path 24.
  • the movement path 24 opens to the upper surface 25 of the case 2 and extends substantially downward from the upper surface 25.
  • the operation unit 5 includes an upper end portion 51, a connecting portion 52, and a lower end portion 53.
  • the upper end portion 51, the connecting portion 52, and the lower end portion 53 are one-connected members that are connected from the upper side to the lower side in this order.
  • the operation unit 5 is made of resin, for example.
  • the upper end portion 51 of the operation portion 5 is, for example, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped portion.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 is a plane substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction.
  • An operation recess that is recessed downward is provided at the center of the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51.
  • the connecting portion 52 extends downward from the lower end of the upper end portion 51, and connects the upper end portion 51 and the lower end portion 53.
  • the connecting portion 52 is, for example, a substantially plate-shaped portion whose width in the thickness direction is larger than the width in the left-right direction.
  • the lower end 53 extends downward from the lower end of the connecting 52.
  • the lower end portion 53 is, for example, a substantially plate-shaped or substantially columnar portion.
  • the width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the upper end portion 51 in the vertical direction.
  • the width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the connecting portion 52 in the vertical direction.
  • the width of the lower end portion 53 in the left-right direction is substantially constant at the upper portion of the lower end portion 53, and gradually decreases from the upper portion toward the lower side.
  • the width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction.
  • the width of the upper end of the lower end 53 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the lower end of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction.
  • the left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion 52 are substantially perpendicular to the left and right directions, and extend substantially parallel to the vertical direction.
  • the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 projects to the left from the upper end of the connecting portion 52.
  • a first inclined surface 56 extending diagonally downward to the left from the upper surface 511 is provided at the upper left end portion of the upper end portion 51.
  • the first inclined surface 56 is oriented downward away from the center line of the movement path 24 (that is, a straight line extending in the vertical direction through the substantially center of the movement path 24 in the left-right direction and the thickness direction). It is an inclined surface.
  • the angle formed by the first inclined surface 56 of the operation unit 5 and the upper surface 511 is about 45 °. The angle is greater than 0 ° and less than 90 °.
  • the left side surface of the lower end 53 of the operation unit 5 extends downward substantially parallel to the upper end in the vertical direction, and then moves downward to the right.
  • the elastic member 4 partially contacts the left side surface of the lower end 53.
  • the lower end 53 of the operation unit 5 projects to the right from the lower end of the connecting portion 52.
  • an operation step portion 55 projecting to the right is formed at the lower end of the connecting portion 52 (that is, the upper end of the lower end portion 53).
  • the operation step portion 55 of the operation portion 5 is locked to a part of the case 2, so that the movement of the operation portion 5 upward is restricted.
  • the lower end portion 53 of the operation portion 5 is in contact with the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 as described above, and the operation step portion 55 is pressed against the above-mentioned part of the case 2 by the restoring force of the elastic member 4.
  • the operation unit 5 is locked to the case 2, so that the operation unit 5 is prevented from moving upward from the position shown in FIG.
  • the operating portion 5 When assembling the connecting device 1, the operating portion 5 is first arranged in the region where the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the non-flexible state (that is, the uncompressed state) should exist, and the elastic member 4 is assembled. Is attached to the case 2 in a bent state. As a result, the above structure is realized.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation portion 5 is located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation portion 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is located inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 with respect to the area around the operation unit 5.
  • the side surfaces 513 of the operation unit 5 in the thickness direction are located inside the case 2 of the side surfaces 26 in the thickness direction of the case 2 with respect to the area around the operation unit 5. , Or, it is located on substantially the same plane as the area. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5.
  • the surface of the operation unit 5 is the surface of the case 2 in the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
  • the case 2 is provided with a second inclined surface 241 that is inclined in the vertical direction substantially parallel to the first inclined surface 56 in the movement path 24 below the upper surface 511 of the operation unit 5 shown in FIG.
  • the second inclined surface 241 is located on the left side of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5, and extends in a direction away from the upper end portion 51 (that is, diagonally downward to the left) as it goes downward. ..
  • the width of the movement path 24 in the left-right direction gradually increases as it goes downward at the position of the second inclined surface 241.
  • the second inclined surface 241 is located at a position separated downward from the first inclined surface 56.
  • the second inclined surface 241 extends diagonally downward to the right.
  • the operation unit 5 is pushed toward the inside of the case 2 from the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 2, and moves downward along the movement path 24.
  • a worker brings the tip of a normal flat-blade screwdriver or the like into contact with the operation recess of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5, and points downward to the operation unit 5 via the flat-blade screwdriver. Apply force.
  • the operation unit 5 moves downward, the elastic member 4 bends and the shape of the elastic member 4 is changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the lower end portion 53 of the operating portion 5, and is separated from the terminal portion 3 to the left side. As a result, the lower end of the insertion hole 21 is opened.
  • the state of the connected device 1 shown in FIG. 5 is referred to as an “insertion hole open state”.
  • the operating portion 5 moves downward while maintaining contact with the elastic member 4, and the first inclined surface of the operating portion 5
  • the 56 and the second inclined surface 241 of the case 2 are located at substantially the same position in the vertical direction.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member 4 pushes the lower end portion 53 of the operation portion 5 to the right, and the operation portion 5 is slightly tilted.
  • the lower end 53 of the operation unit 5 moves to the right, which is the direction intersecting the movement path 24, and the upper end 51 of the operation unit 5 moves to the left, which is the direction intersecting the movement path 24. ..
  • the first inclined surface 56 of the operation unit 5 moves to the left while being in contact with the second inclined surface 241 of the case 2, and is located below the second inclined surface 241.
  • the second inclined surface 241 is formed so as to be substantially parallel to the first inclined surface 56 in the operation unit 5 in the slightly inclined state described above. However, since the inclination of the operation unit 5 is slight, the second inclined surface 241 is substantially parallel to the first inclined surface 56 even when the operation unit 5 is not tilted.
  • FIG. 6 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion in the vicinity of the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 in this state.
  • the first inclined surface 56 is brought into contact with the second inclined surface 241 from below by the restoring force of the elastic member 4 and is pressed upward.
  • the second inclined surface 241 of the case 2 partially supports the restoring force of the elastic member 4. Therefore, the force of the worker required to maintain the operation unit 5 in the downwardly pushed state is reduced. That is, in the connecting device 1, the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 constitute a holding force reducing mechanism 60 that reduces the force for maintaining the operation unit 5 in the case 2 in a pushed state.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member 4 supported by the second inclined surface 241 is smaller than the total restoring force of the elastic member 4. Therefore, the operation unit 5 is not locked to the second inclined surface 241 only by the support by the second inclined surface 241.
  • the above-mentioned inclination of the operation unit 5 (that is, the movement of the upper end portion 51 to the left side) is performed in a short time, and the operator holding the flat-blade screwdriver feels a response (that is, due to the inclination). So-called click feeling) occurs.
  • a sound for example, a clicking sound caused by the inclination of the operation unit 5 is also generated. Therefore, the worker can easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state.
  • the lower left end of the upper end 51 of the operation unit 5 is a stop surface provided in the movement path 24 of the case 2 and substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction. Contact 242 from above. Thereby, it is possible to limit the excessive movement of the operation unit 5 downward. Further, the operator can more easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state by the response and / or the generation of sound due to the contact between the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 and the stop surface 242. You can also.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 than the area around the operation unit 5. Located on the side).
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 may be located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5.
  • the surface of the operation unit 5 is the surface of the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
  • the elastic member 4 In the state where the insertion hole is opened shown in FIG. 5, the elastic member 4 is more bent than the elastic member 4 in the wire-connected state described later, and does not sandwich the electric wire with the terminal portion 3.
  • the insertion hole open state which is the state of the connecting device 1 shown in FIG. 5, is a “non-connection state” in which the pinching of the electric wire between the elastic member 4 and the terminal portion 3 is released.
  • the electric wire 91 is inserted into the insertion hole 21 of the connecting device 1 as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 5 while the elastic member 4 is maintained in the insertion hole open state.
  • the electric wire 91 may be, for example, a single wire or a stranded wire. Further, the electric wire 91 may be a stranded wire provided with a rod-shaped crimp terminal or the like at the tip end portion.
  • the diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is preferably 0.42 mm or more, for example.
  • the diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is practically 2.3 mm or less.
  • the diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways. Further, the diameter of the portion other than the tip end portion of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways.
  • the electric wire 91 is moved downward in the insertion hole 21 and is inserted between the terminal portion 3 and the elastic member 4 in the insertion hole open state as shown in FIG. 7. After that, the force of the worker pushing the operation unit 5 is weakened, and the restoring force of the elastic member 4 becomes larger than the sum of the force of the worker and the bearing force of the second inclined surface 241.
  • the movable portion 43 moves diagonally upward to the right and comes into contact with the electric wire 91 from the left side as shown in FIG.
  • the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3.
  • the electric wire 91 and the terminal portion 3 are electrically and mechanically connected.
  • the electric wire 91 is connected to the connecting device 1.
  • the state shown in FIG. 8 is referred to as a “connection state”. As described above, the elastic member 4 in the connected state sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3.
  • the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is moved diagonally upward to the right to start moving the operating portion 5 upward.
  • the first inclined surface 56 moves diagonally upward to the right along the second inclined surface 241 while maintaining the state of being in contact with the second inclined surface 241.
  • the operation unit 5 moves upward from the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. 7, and stops in a state where the lower end portion 53 is in contact with the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4.
  • the first inclined surface 56 of the operation unit 5 in the connected state is located above the second inclined surface 241.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 with respect to the area around the operation unit 5.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 may be located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5.
  • the surface of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24) in the surface of the case 2. It is located or is located substantially in the same plane as the area.
  • connection state shown in FIG. 8 when the connecting device 1 is arranged so that the upper side in FIG. 8 is the lower side in the direction of gravity, the operation unit 5 is moved upward in the drawing from the elastic member 4 due to gravity. Separate. Then, the operation step portion 55 of the operation portion 5 is locked to a part of the case 2 as in the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 2, and the upward movement of the operation portion 5 is restricted. Therefore, it is prevented that the operation unit 5 moves upward from the position shown in FIG.
  • the first inclined surface 56 of the operating unit 5 comes into contact with the second inclined surface 241 of the case 2 from below, and a part of the restoring force of the elastic member 4 is a second inclined surface. Supported by 241.
  • the worker can easily put the connected device 1 in the insertion hole open state (that is, the unconnected state). Can be recognized. Further, it is more easily recognized that the connected device 1 is in the insertion hole open state (that is, the unconnected state) due to the response and / or the generation of sound due to the contact between the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 and the stop surface 242. can do.
  • the elastic member 4 can be deformed between the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 2, the insertion hole open state shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, and the connection state shown in FIG.
  • first position the position of the operating portion 5 in contact with the elastic member 4 in the connected state
  • second position the position of the operation unit 5 in contact with the elastic member 4 in the insertion hole open state (that is, the non-connection state)
  • third position the position of the operation portion 5 in which the operation step portion 55 is locked to a part of the case 2.
  • the above-mentioned movement path 24 connects the third position, the first position, and the second position of the operation unit 5 in this order.
  • the third position is located on the movement path 24 on the opposite side of the first position from the second position.
  • the first inclined surface 56 of the operating portion 5 abuts on the second inclined surface 241 of the case 2 from below.
  • the operation step portion 55 is locked to a part of the case 2, so that the upward movement of the operation portion 5 (that is, the movement in the direction away from the second position) is restricted.
  • it is sufficient that a part of the operation unit 5 is locked to a part of the case 2, and the operation step portion 55 does not necessarily have to be locked to a part of the case 2.
  • the connecting device 1 to which the electric wire 91 is connected includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5.
  • the terminal portion 3 is conductive and is fixed to the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4 is attached to the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4 presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91.
  • the operation unit 5 changes the shape of the elastic member 4 by moving along a movement path 24 extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4 is in a connected state in which the electric wire 91 is sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 and a non-connected state in which the electric wire 91 is released from being sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 by being bent more than the connected state (that is,). It can be deformed with the insertion hole open state).
  • the operation unit 5 comes into contact with the elastic member 4 in the connected state at the first position.
  • the operating unit 5 deforms the elastic member 4 into a non-wired state by being pushed into the second position below the first position while maintaining the contact state with the elastic member 4.
  • the connecting device 1 further includes a holding force reducing mechanism 60 that reduces the force for maintaining the operating unit 5 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 when the operating unit 5 is located at the second position. As a result, the force for maintaining the connected device 1 in the unconnected state can be reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1 can be improved.
  • the operation unit 5 has a first inclined surface 56 that inclines in a direction away from the center line of the movement path 24 as it goes downward.
  • the case 2 has a second inclined surface 241 that is inclined in the vertical direction in parallel with the first inclined surface 56 in the movement path 24.
  • the holding force reducing mechanism 60 includes a first inclined surface 56 and a second inclined surface 241. In the state where the operation unit 5 is located at the first position, the first inclined surface 56 is located at a position separated upward from the second inclined surface 241. When the operation unit 5 is located at the second position, the first inclined surface 56 comes into contact with the second inclined surface 241 from below.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member 4 in the non-connected state presses the first inclined surface 56 upward with respect to the second inclined surface 241 and the second inclined surface 241 restores the elastic member 4. Partially support the force. Therefore, when the electric wire 91 is connected to the connected device 1 in the unconnected state, the operation unit 5 can be easily moved from the second position to the first position by relaxing the force for pushing the operation unit 5 downward with a flat-blade screwdriver or the like. The electric wire 91 can be easily sandwiched between the movable portion 43 and the terminal portion 3 of the elastic member 4.
  • the operation unit 5 is similarly moved by a flat-blade screwdriver or the like. By loosening the downward pushing force, the operation unit 5 can be easily moved from the second position to the third position. Therefore, when connecting the electric wire 91 or disconnecting the electric wire 91, it is not necessary to repeatedly insert a flat-blade screwdriver or the like into the moving path 24, so that the operability of the connected device 1 can be improved.
  • the first inclined surface 56 is preferably provided at the upper end of the operation unit 5.
  • the first inclined surface 56 can be made visible, so that the timing at which the operation unit 5 reaches the second position from the third position (that is, the timing at which the force for pushing the operation unit 5 is reduced) and the like can be set. , It can be grasped relatively easily and intuitively. Therefore, the operability of the connected device 1 can be further improved.
  • the first inclined surface 56 is colored in a color different from that of the surrounding portion, the color of the first inclined surface 56 cannot be seen because the operation unit 5 is located at the second position, so that the operation unit 5 becomes invisible. It is easier to visually grasp that the second position has been reached.
  • the elastic member 4 is preferably a leaf spring. As a result, the structure of the connected device 1 can be simplified. As a result, the manufacturing of the connected device 1 can be facilitated.
  • a convex portion 561 may be provided on the first inclined surface 56 of the operation unit 5, and a concave portion 243 may be provided on the second inclined surface 241 of the case 2.
  • the concave portion 243 fits with the convex portion 561 in a state where the operating portion 5 is located at the above-mentioned second position. As a result, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5 in the case 2 in the pushed state can be further reduced.
  • a convex portion may be provided on the second inclined surface 241 of the case 2, and a concave portion may be provided on the first inclined surface 56 of the operation unit 5.
  • one of the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 has a convex portion
  • the other surface of the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 has a convex portion. It is preferable to have a concave portion that fits with the convex portion in a state where the operating portion 5 is located at the second position.
  • the operability of the connected device 1 can be further improved. Even in this case, when the force for pushing the operating portion 5 is relaxed, the operating portion 5 moves upward and the movable portion 43 moves upward to the right due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4.
  • the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 may have a rough surface portion 562, 244 having a surface roughness larger than that of the surrounding portion. .. Since the frictional resistance between the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 increases due to the contact between the rough surface portion 562 and the rough surface portion 244, the operating portion 5 is maintained in a pushed state into the case 2. The force can be further reduced.
  • the rough surface portion is provided on at least one of the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241. Even in this case, since the frictional resistance between the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 increases, the operation unit 5 is maintained in a state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, in a non-connected state). The force can be further reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1 can be further improved. Even when the frictional resistance is increased, if the force for pushing the operating portion 5 is relaxed, the operating portion 5 moves upward due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4, and the movable portion 43 moves upward to the right. Moving.
  • FIG. 11 and 12 are sectional views showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation unit 5a of the connected device 1a.
  • the connected device 1a is substantially the same as the connected device 1 except that the first inclined surface 56a and the second inclined surface 241a are provided at positions different from the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 shown in FIG. Has a structure.
  • the same reference numerals are given to the configurations of the connected equipment 1a corresponding to the configurations of the connected equipment 1.
  • FIG. 11 shows a state in which the operation unit 5a on the right side of the connected device 1a is located in the first position (that is, a wiring state), and FIG. 12 shows a state in which the operation unit 5a is located in the second position (that is, non-connection state). (Connection state) is shown.
  • the operation portion 5a has a first inclined surface 56a at the right end portion (that is, the end portion on the side far from the connecting portion 52) of the operation step portion 55.
  • the first inclined surface 56a is provided below the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5a.
  • the first inclined surface 56a faces diagonally downward to the right from the operation step portion 55.
  • the first inclined surface 56a is a surface that inclines in a direction away from the center line of the movement path 24 as it goes downward.
  • the case 2 has a second inclined surface 241a that is inclined in the vertical direction in parallel with the first inclined surface 56a in the movement path 24.
  • the first inclined surface 56a is located at a position separated upward from the second inclined surface 241a. Further, as shown in FIG. 12, when the operating portion 5a is located at the second position, the first inclined surface 56a comes into contact with the second inclined surface 241a from below. As a result, similarly to the connected device 1 shown in FIG. 6, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5a in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state shown in FIG. 12) can be reduced.
  • the first inclined surface 56a and the second inclined surface 241a constitute a holding force reducing mechanism 60a that reduces the force for maintaining the operating portion 5a in the case 2 in a pushed state. Thereby, the operability of the connected device 1a can be improved.
  • the first inclined surface 56a is pressed upward against the second inclined surface 241a by the restoring force of the elastic member 4 in the non-connected state, and the second inclined surface 241a is elastic. It is preferable to partially support the restoring force of the member 4. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1a can be improved as in the connected device 1.
  • the first inclined surface 56a is provided below the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5a. As a result, since the first inclined surface 56a is located inside the case 2, it is possible to prevent it from colliding with a flat-blade screwdriver or the like used for pushing the operating portion 5a and being damaged.
  • the elastic member 4 is a leaf spring as in the connecting device 1.
  • the structure of the connected device 1a can be simplified.
  • the connection device 1a can be easily manufactured.
  • one of the first inclined surface 56a and the second inclined surface 241a has a convex portion
  • the other of the first inclined surface 56a and the second inclined surface 241a has a convex portion.
  • the surface has a concave portion that fits with the convex portion in a state where the operating portion 5a is located at the second position.
  • a rough surface portion may be provided on at least one of the first inclined surface 56a and the second inclined surface 241a.
  • FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the connecting device 1b according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the connected device 1b.
  • FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of the connected device 1b cut at the position of XV-XV in FIG.
  • the connecting device 1b is a push-in type connecting device to which the electric wire 91 is connected.
  • the connected device 1b is used, for example, as a terminal block such as a control panel.
  • a thin plate-shaped end plate 11 is attached to the front side of the connecting device 1b.
  • a state in which a plurality of connected devices 1b are connected is shown by a two-dot chain line.
  • FIGS. 14 and 15 show a state in which the electric wire 91 is not inserted into the connecting device 1b.
  • FIG. 14 the configuration on the back side of the cross section is also shown.
  • those corresponding to the configuration of the connected device 1 shown in FIGS. 1 to 4 are designated by the same reference numerals.
  • FIG. 14 shows a cross section of the connected device 1b at substantially the center in the thickness direction.
  • the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the thickness direction do not necessarily have to coincide with the mounting direction when the connected device 1b is used. Further, the vertical direction does not necessarily have to coincide with the direction of gravity.
  • the connecting device 1b includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4b, and an operating portion 5b.
  • the case 2 houses the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4b, and the operation portion 5b inside.
  • the case 2 is made of resin, for example.
  • the case 2 is provided with two insertion holes 21 into which electric wires can be inserted.
  • two terminal portions 3, two elastic members 4b, and two operating portions 5b are housed.
  • the connecting device 1b includes two sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4b, and an operating portion 5b.
  • the connecting device 1b may include one set or three or more sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4b, and an operation portion 5b.
  • Each set of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4b, and the operation portion 5b is arranged corresponding to the insertion hole 21.
  • the two sets of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4b, and the operating portion 5b have the same shape and size, and are arranged in opposite directions. Focusing on the insertion hole 21 on the right side in FIG. 14, the terminal portion 3 is located on the right side of the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21 and extends downward from the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21.
  • the elastic member 4b extends diagonally upward to the left from the lower end of the insertion hole 21, and further extends diagonally downward to the left.
  • the operation unit 5b is arranged on the left side of the insertion hole 21 and above the elastic member 4b.
  • the terminal portion 3 is a conductive member fixed to the case 2.
  • the terminal portion 3 is made of metal, for example.
  • the right terminal portion 3 in FIG. 14 is electrically connected to the left terminal portion 3 in FIG.
  • the two terminal portions 3 are connected members. Specifically, the lower ends of the two terminal portions 3 are connected by a conductive terminal connecting portion 32 extending in the left-right direction.
  • the elastic member 4b is an elastically deformable member attached to the case 2. As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the elastic member 4b is a substantially strip-shaped leaf spring.
  • the elastic member 4b is made of metal, for example.
  • the elastic member 4b may be formed of a conductive material or an insulating material such as a resin.
  • the elastic member 4b has, for example, a shape that is bent into a substantially V shape or a substantially U shape at the central portion 41 in the longitudinal direction. That is, the central portion 41 is a bent portion located substantially in the center of the elastic member 4b in the longitudinal direction.
  • the elastic member 4b is fixed to the case 2 with the central portion 41 located at the upper end.
  • the elastic member 4b is attached to the case 2 with both ends facing substantially downward by fixing the central portion 41 to the case 2.
  • the portion 22 of the case 2 that contacts the central portion 41 from below is referred to as a “support portion 22”.
  • the support portion 22 has a substantially columnar shape centered on a central axis facing the thickness direction.
  • the elastic member 4b includes a pair of arm portions 42b extending diagonally downward from the central portion 41 on both the left and right sides of the central portion 41. The distance between the pair of arms 42b in the left-right direction increases downward.
  • the pair of arm portions 42b are substantially axisymmetric with respect to the center line passing through the central portion 41. In the state shown in FIG. 14, the angle formed by the pair of arm portions 42b is larger than 0 ° and smaller than 180 °. In the example shown in FIG. 14, the angle is greater than 90 °.
  • the arm portion 42b extending from the central portion 41 to the right side of the support portion 22 of the elastic member 4b is in contact with the terminal portion 3 extending in the vertical direction.
  • the pair of arm portions 42b are elastically deformed with the upper end portion of the support portion 22 as a fulcrum, and are bent in a direction approaching each other in the left-right direction. Further, when the downward pressing force on the pair of arms 42b disappears, the pair of arms 42b returns to the original state (that is, elastically returns) due to the restoring force.
  • the insertion hole closed state is a state before the electric wire is inserted into the insertion hole 21, that is, an initial state before the connecting device 1b is used.
  • the elastic member 4b in the insertion hole closed state (that is, the initial state) is slightly bent in the direction in which the pair of arm portions 42b approach each other. This makes it possible to prevent the elastic member 4b from falling off from the case 2.
  • the operation unit 5b is a substantially columnar member extending in the vertical direction.
  • the operation unit 5b is located inside a hole portion (hereinafter, referred to as “movement path 24”) extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2.
  • the operation unit 5b can move in the vertical direction along the movement path 24.
  • the movement path 24 opens to the upper surface 25 of the case 2 and extends substantially downward from the upper surface 25.
  • the operation unit 5b includes an upper end portion 51, a connecting portion 52, and a pair of pressing portions 53b.
  • the upper end portion 51, the connecting portion 52, and the pair of pressing portions 53b are connected members that are connected from the upper side to the lower side in this order.
  • the operation unit 5b is made of, for example, resin.
  • the upper end portion 51 of the operation portion 5b is, for example, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped portion.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 is a plane substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction.
  • An operation recess that is recessed downward is provided at the center of the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51.
  • the connecting portion 52 extends downward from the lower end of the upper end portion 51, and connects the upper end portion 51 and the pair of pressing portions 53b.
  • the connecting portion 52 is, for example, a substantially plate-shaped portion whose width in the thickness direction is larger than the width in the left-right direction.
  • the pair of pressing portions 53b extend diagonally downward on both the left and right sides from the lower end of the connecting portion 52.
  • the pair of pressing portions 53b are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction and extend substantially in the vertical direction.
  • the distance between the pair of pressing portions 53b in the left-right direction increases toward the bottom.
  • the distance in the left-right direction that is, the distance in the left-right direction between the inner side surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 53b
  • the inner side surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 53b are inclined surfaces that are inclined with respect to the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, respectively.
  • the lower end of one of the pair of pressing portions 53b is the outer surface (that is, FIG. 14) of one of the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b in the left-right direction. Contact the top surface inside). Further, when the outer surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 53b come into contact with a part of the case 2, the upward movement of the operating portion 5b is restricted. In the insertion hole closed state, the lower ends of both of the pair of pressing portions 53b may come into contact with the outer surfaces of both of the pair of arm portions 42b. In other words, in the insertion hole closed state, at least one lower end of the pair of pressing portions 53b comes into contact with at least one outer surface of the pair of arm portions 42b.
  • the width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the upper end portion 51 in the vertical direction.
  • the width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the connecting portion 52 in the vertical direction.
  • the width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction. Focusing on the operation unit 5b on the right side in FIG. 14, the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5b projects to the left from the upper end of the connecting portion 52.
  • the distance between the lower ends of the pair of pressing portions 53b in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the lower ends of the connecting portions 52 in the left-right direction.
  • the left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion 52 are substantially perpendicular to the left and right directions, and extend substantially parallel to the vertical direction.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5b is located on substantially the same plane as the region around the operating portion 5b in the upper surface 25 of the case 2.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5b is located inside the case 2 (that is, below the region) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 with respect to the region around the operating portion 5b.
  • both side surfaces 513 of the operation portion 5b in the thickness direction are located inside the case 2 of the side surfaces 26 in the thickness direction of the case 2 rather than the area around the operation portion 5b. , Or, it is located on substantially the same plane as the area. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5b.
  • the surface of the operation unit 5b is the surface of the case 2 in the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5b (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
  • the operation unit 5b is pushed toward the inside of the case 2 from the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 14, and moves downward along the movement path 24.
  • a worker brings the tip of a normal flat-blade screwdriver or the like into contact with the operation recess of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5b, and points downward to the operation unit 5b via the flat-blade screwdriver. Apply force.
  • the elastic member 4b bends and the shape of the elastic member 4b is changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG.
  • the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b are pushed downward by the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operating portion 5b, and the distance between the pair of arm portions 42b in the left-right direction is increased. It becomes smaller. In other words, the pair of arms 42b approach each other in the left-right direction. The right arm portion 42b is separated from the terminal portion 3 to the left side. As a result, the lower end of the insertion hole 21 is opened.
  • the state of the connected device 1b shown in FIG. 16 is referred to as an “insertion hole open state”.
  • the angle formed by the pair of arm portions 42b is larger than 0 ° and smaller than 180 °. In the example shown in FIG. 16, the angle is less than 90 °.
  • the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b are sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operation portion 5b in a state of being bent in a direction approaching each other in the left-right direction.
  • the inner surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 53b come into contact with the outer surfaces of the pair of arm portions 42b.
  • the lower ends of the pair of arm portions 42b are located below the lower ends of the pair of pressing portions 53b. A restoring force that tries to return diagonally upward acts on the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b.
  • the inner surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 53b are pressed in the left-right direction (that is, in the direction away from each other) by the component force in the horizontal direction (that is, the left-right direction) of the restoring force. Since the pair of pressing portions 53b are formed so as not to be substantially elastically deformed, the horizontal component force of the restoring force of the elastic member 4b is received by the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operating portion 5b. That is, the restoring force of the elastic member 4b is partially supported by the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operating portion 5b. Therefore, the force with which the elastic member 4b pushes the operation portion 5b upward is reduced, and the force of the worker required to maintain the operation portion 5b in the downward pushed state is reduced.
  • the pair of arm portions 42b and the pair of pressing portions 53b constitute a holding force reducing mechanism 60b that reduces the force for maintaining the operating portion 5b in the case 2 in a pushed state.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member 4b supported by the pair of pressing portions 53b is smaller than the total restoring force of the elastic member 4b. Therefore, the state in which the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b are located between the pair of pressing portions 53b is not maintained only by the pinching by the pair of pressing portions 53b.
  • the friction between the inner side surface of the pair of pressing portions 53b and the outer surface of the pair of arm portions 42b causes resistance to the hand of the worker holding the flat-blade screwdriver pushing the operating portion 5b. Therefore, the worker can easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state.
  • the lower end of the upper end portion 51 of the operation portion 5b is substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction provided in the movement path 24 of the case 2. It contacts the stop surface 242 from above. Thereby, it is possible to limit the excessive movement of the operation unit 5b downward. Further, the operator can more easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state by the response and / or the generation of sound due to the contact between the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5b and the stop surface 242. You can also.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5b is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 than the area around the operation unit 5b. Located on the side).
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5b may be located on substantially the same plane as the region around the operating portion 5b in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5b.
  • the surface of the operation unit 5b is more of the case 2 than the area of the surface of the case 2 around the operation unit 5b (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
  • the elastic member 4b In the state where the insertion hole is opened as shown in FIG. 16, the elastic member 4b is more bent than the elastic member 4b in the connected state described later, and does not sandwich the electric wire with the terminal portion 3.
  • the insertion hole open state which is the state of the connecting device 1b shown in FIG. 16, is a “non-connection state” in which the pinching of the electric wire between the elastic member 4b and the terminal portion 3 is released.
  • the electric wire 91 is inserted into the insertion hole 21 of the connecting device 1b as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 16 while the elastic member 4b is maintained in the insertion hole open state.
  • the electric wire 91 may be, for example, a single wire or a stranded wire. Further, the electric wire 91 may be a stranded wire provided with a rod-shaped crimp terminal or the like at the tip end portion.
  • the diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is preferably 0.42 mm or more, for example.
  • the diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is practically 2.3 mm or less.
  • the diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways. Further, the diameter of the portion other than the tip end portion of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways.
  • the electric wire 91 is moved downward in the insertion hole 21 and is inserted between the terminal portion 3 and the elastic member 4b in the insertion hole open state as shown in FIG. After that, the force of the worker pushing the operating portion 5b is weakened, and the restoring force of the elastic member 4b becomes larger than the sum of the force of the worker and the supporting force of the pair of pressing portions 53b.
  • the pair of arm portions 42b moves diagonally upward and, as shown in FIG. 18, are released from being pinched by the pair of pressing portions 53b.
  • the right arm portion 42b of the elastic member 4b contacts the electric wire 91 from the left side.
  • the arm portion 42b presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3.
  • the electric wire 91 and the terminal portion 3 are electrically and mechanically connected.
  • the electric wire 91 is connected to the connecting device 1b.
  • the state shown in FIG. 18 is referred to as a “connection state”.
  • the elastic member 4b in the connected state sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3.
  • the operation portion 5b moves upward from the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. Stops in contact with the outer surface of the arm portion 42b.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5b is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 than the area around the operation unit 5b.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5b may be located on substantially the same plane as the region around the operating portion 5b in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5b.
  • the surface of the operation unit 5b is inside the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5b (that is, the area around the movement path 24) in the surface of the case 2. It is located or is located substantially in the same plane as the area.
  • the worker can easily recognize that the connected device 1b is in the insertion hole open state (that is, the unconnected state). Further, it is more easily recognized that the connected device 1b is in the insertion hole open state (that is, the unconnected state) due to the response and / or the generation of sound due to the contact between the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5b and the stop surface 242. can do.
  • the elastic member 4b can be deformed between the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 14, the insertion hole open state shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and the connection state shown in FIG.
  • first position the position of the operating portion 5b in contact with the elastic member 4b in the connected state
  • second position the position of the operating portion 5b that comes into contact with the elastic member 4b in the insertion hole open state (that is, the non-connection state)
  • third position the position of the operating portion 5b in which the pair of pressing portions 53b are locked to a part of the case 2 is referred to as a "third position".
  • the above-mentioned movement path 24 connects the third position, the first position, and the second position of the operation unit 5b in this order.
  • the third position is located on the movement path 24 on the opposite side of the first position from the second position.
  • the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b are sandwiched by the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operating portion 5b.
  • the pair of pressing portions 53b are locked to a part of the case 2, so that the upward movement of the operating portion 5b (that is, the movement in the direction away from the second position) is restricted.
  • it is sufficient that a part of the operating portion 5b is locked to a part of the case 2, and the pair of pressing portions 53b do not necessarily have to be locked to a part of the case 2.
  • the connecting device 1b to which the electric wire 91 is connected includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4b, and an operating portion 5b.
  • the terminal portion 3 is conductive and is fixed to the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4b is attached to the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4b presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91.
  • the operation unit 5b changes the shape of the elastic member 4b by moving along a movement path 24 extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4b is in a connected state in which the electric wire 91 is sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 and a non-connected state in which the electric wire 91 is released from being sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 by being bent more than the connected state (that is,). It can be deformed with the insertion hole open state).
  • the operation unit 5b comes into contact with the elastic member 4b in the connected state at the first position.
  • the operating unit 5b deforms the elastic member 4b into a non-wired state by being pushed into the second position below the first position while maintaining the contact state with the elastic member 4b.
  • the connecting device 1b further includes a holding force reducing mechanism 60b that reduces the force for maintaining the operating unit 5b in a state of being pushed into the case 2 when the operating unit 5b is located at the second position. As a result, the force for maintaining the connected device 1b in the unconnected state can be reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1b can be improved.
  • the elastic member 4b is a leaf spring including a bent portion (that is, a central portion 41) located at the upper end and a pair of arm portions 42b.
  • the pair of arm portions 42b extend downward on both the left and right sides of the central portion 41. The distance between the pair of arms 42b in the left-right direction increases downward.
  • the operation unit 5b includes a pair of pressing units 53b that are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction and extend in the vertical direction. The distance between the pair of pressing portions 53b in the left-right direction becomes smaller toward the upper side.
  • the holding force reducing mechanism 60b includes a pair of arm portions 42b and a pair of pressing portions 53b.
  • the inner surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 53b are pressed in the left-right direction by the pair of arm portions 42b by the restoring force of the elastic member 4b in the unconnected state, and the pair of pressing portions 53b partially supports the restoring force of the elastic member 4b. Therefore, when the electric wire 91 is connected to the connected device 1b in the unconnected state, the operation unit 5b can be easily moved from the second position to the first position by relaxing the force for pushing the operation unit 5b downward with a flat-blade screwdriver or the like. The electric wire 91 can be easily sandwiched between the arm portion 42b and the terminal portion 3 of the elastic member 4b.
  • the operation unit 5b is similarly moved by a flat-blade screwdriver or the like. By loosening the downward pushing force, the operation unit 5b can be easily moved from the second position to the third position. Therefore, when connecting the electric wire 91 or disconnecting the electric wire 91, it is not necessary to repeatedly insert a flat-blade screwdriver or the like into the moving path 24, so that the operability of the connected device 1b can be improved.
  • the angle formed by the pair of arm portions 42b is larger than 0 ° and smaller than 180 °.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member 4b is a horizontal component supported by the pair of pressing portions 53b and a vertical component that pushes the operating portion 5b upward. And have. Therefore, the force for maintaining the operating portion 5b in the case 2 in the pushed state (that is, the unconnected state) can be reduced, and the pair of arm portions 42b when the force for pushing the operating portion 5b is relaxed can be slanted. It can be moved upwards.
  • the lower ends of the pair of arm portions 42b may be at the same position as the lower ends of the pair of pressing portions 53b, and the lower ends of the pair of pressing portions 53b. It may be located above or below.
  • the lower ends of the pair of arm portions 42b are located below the lower ends of the pair of pressing portions 53b.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member 4b is a horizontal component supported by the pair of pressing portions 53b and a vertical component that pushes the operating portion 5b upward. And have. Therefore, the force for maintaining the operating portion 5b in the case 2 in the pushed state (that is, the unconnected state) can be reduced, and the pair of arm portions 42b when the force for pushing the operating portion 5b is relaxed can be slanted. It can be moved upwards.
  • the angle formed by the pair of arm portions 42b may be 0 ° in the state where the operating portion 5b is located at the second position.
  • the angle formed by the pair of arm portions 42b is larger than 0 ° and smaller than 180 °, and the lower ends of the pair of arm portions 42b are formed. It is preferable that at least one of the pair of pressing portions 53b located below the lower ends is satisfied.
  • the distance between the pair of pressing portions 53b in the left-right direction extends over substantially the entire length in the vertical direction. It may be substantially constant.
  • the lower ends of the pair of arm portions 42b are located below the lower ends of the pair of pressing portions 53b.
  • the pair of arm portions 42b are sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions 53b in a state of being bent in a direction approaching each other in the left-right direction.
  • the operation units 5b are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction and extend in the vertical direction, and the distance in the left-right direction becomes smaller toward the upper side, or the distance in the left-right direction is constant.
  • the pressing portion 53b may be provided.
  • a convex portion 531 may be provided on the inner surface of the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operating portion 5b, and a concave portion 421 may be provided on the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b. ..
  • the concave portion 421 fits with the convex portion 531 of the pressing portion 53b in a state where the operating portion 5b is located at the above-mentioned second position (that is, in a non-connection state). As a result, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5b in the case 2 in the pushed state can be further reduced.
  • the convex portion 531 may be provided only on one pressing portion 53b, and the concave portion 421 may be provided only on one arm portion 42b.
  • the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operating portion 5b may be provided with a concave portion
  • the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b may be provided with a convex portion.
  • one of the pair of pressing portions 53b and the pair of arm portions 42b has a convex portion
  • the other of the pair of pressing portions 53b and the pair of arm portions 42b has the operating portion 5b. It is preferable to have a concave portion that fits with the convex portion in a state of being located at the second position (that is, a non-connection state).
  • the force for maintaining the operation unit 5b in the state of being pushed into the case 2 can be further reduced.
  • the operability of the connected device 1b can be further improved. Even in this case, when the force for pushing the operating portion 5b is relaxed, the operating portion 5b moves upward and the pair of arm portions 42b moves diagonally upward due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4b.
  • a rough surface portion 532 may be provided on the inner side surface of the pair of pressing portions 53b, and a rough surface portion 422 may be provided on the outer surface of the pair of arm portions 42b.
  • the rough surface portion 532 and the rough surface portion 422 are regions having a surface roughness larger than that of the surrounding portions, respectively.
  • At least one of the inner side surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 53b and the outer surfaces of the pair of arm portions 42b may have a rough surface portion. Even in this case, since the frictional resistance between the pair of pressing portions 53b and the pair of arm portions 42b increases, the operating portion 5b is maintained in a state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, in a non-wired state). The force can be further reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1b can be further improved. Even in this case, when the force for pushing the operating portion 5b is relaxed, the operating portion 5b moves upward and the pair of arm portions 42b moves diagonally upward due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4b.
  • FIG. 22 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the connecting device 1b provided with the elastic member 4c having a shape different from the above example.
  • a pair of intermediate portions 43b are provided between the central portion 41 and the pair of arm portions 42b.
  • Each of the pair of intermediate portions 43b extends obliquely upward from the central portion 41.
  • the pair of arm portions 42b extend obliquely downward from the upper end portions of the pair of intermediate portions 43b.
  • the pair of intermediate portions 43b may extend diagonally downward from the central portion 41 and then bend upward and extend diagonally upward.
  • the portion between the pair of arm portions 42b is curved or wavy with the central portion 41 as the center in the left-right direction.
  • FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the connecting device 1d according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view of the connected device 1d.
  • FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view of the connected device 1d cut at the position of XXV-XXV in FIG. 24.
  • FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the connected device 1d.
  • the connecting device 1d is a push-in type connecting device to which the electric wire 91 is connected.
  • the connected device 1d is used, for example, as a terminal block such as a control panel.
  • a thin plate-shaped end plate 11 is attached to the front side of the connecting device 1d. Further, in FIG.
  • FIG. 23 a state in which a plurality of connected devices 1d are connected is shown by a two-dot chain line.
  • 24 to 26 show a state in which the electric wire 91 is not inserted into the connecting device 1d.
  • FIG. 24 the configuration on the back side of the cross section is also shown.
  • those corresponding to the configuration of the connected device 1 shown in FIGS. 1 to 4 are designated by the same reference numerals.
  • FIG. 24 shows a cross section of the connected device 1d at substantially the center in the thickness direction.
  • the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the thickness direction do not necessarily have to coincide with the mounting direction when the connected device 1d is used. Further, the vertical direction does not necessarily have to coincide with the direction of gravity.
  • the connecting device 1d includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5.
  • the case 2 houses the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 inside.
  • the case 2 is made of resin, for example.
  • the case 2 is provided with two insertion holes 21 into which electric wires can be inserted.
  • two terminal portions 3, two elastic members 4, and two operating portions 5 are housed inside the case 2, two terminal portions 3, two elastic members 4, and two operating portions 5 are housed.
  • the connecting device 1d includes two sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5.
  • the connecting device 1d may include one set or three or more sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4, and an operation portion 5.
  • Each set of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 is arranged corresponding to the insertion hole 21.
  • the two sets of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 have the same shape and size, and are arranged in opposite directions. Focusing on the insertion hole 21 on the right side in FIG. 24, the terminal portion 3 is located on the right side of the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21 and extends downward from the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21.
  • the elastic member 4 extends from the lower end of the insertion hole 21 to the left side and further downward.
  • the operation unit 5 is arranged on the left side of the insertion hole 21 and above the elastic member 4.
  • the terminal portion 3 is a conductive member fixed to the case 2.
  • the terminal portion 3 is made of metal, for example.
  • the right terminal portion 3 in FIG. 24 is electrically connected to the left terminal portion 3 in FIG. 24.
  • the two terminal portions 3 are connected members. Specifically, the lower ends of the two terminal portions 3 are connected by a conductive terminal connecting portion 32 extending in the left-right direction.
  • the elastic member 4 is an elastically deformable member attached to the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4 is a substantially strip-shaped leaf spring.
  • the elastic member 4 is made of metal, for example.
  • the elastic member 4 may be formed of a conductive material or an insulating material such as a resin.
  • the elastic member 4 has, for example, a shape that is bent into a substantially L-shape, a substantially V-shape, or a substantially U-shape at the central portion 41 in the longitudinal direction.
  • the elastic member 4 is attached to the case 2 with both ends facing substantially downward by sandwiching the central portion 41 between the cases 2.
  • the portion 22 of the case 2 that contacts the central portion 41 from below is referred to as a “support portion 22”.
  • the support portion 22 extends substantially downward from the central portion 41 of the elastic member 4.
  • the portion 42 of the elastic member 4 extending from the central portion 41 to the left side of the support portion 22 is sandwiched between the support portion 22 and another portion of the case 2. Therefore, it is fixed to the case 2. Further, among the elastic members 4, the portion 43 extending from the central portion 41 to the right side of the support portion 22 is in contact with the terminal portion 3 extending in the vertical direction. When the portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the operating portion 5, it elastically deforms with the upper end portion of the support portion 22 as a fulcrum and bends downward. Further, when the downward pressing force on the portion 43 disappears, the portion 43 returns to its original state (that is, elastically returns) due to the restoring force.
  • the portion 42 and the portion 43 of the elastic member 4 will be referred to as a "fixed portion 42” and a “movable portion 43", respectively.
  • the fixed portion 42 and the movable portion 43 are substantially line-symmetrical with respect to the center line passing through the central portion 41.
  • the movable portion 43 extends obliquely downward from the upper end of the fixed portion 42.
  • the insertion hole closed state is a state before the electric wire is inserted into the insertion hole 21, that is, an initial state before the connecting device 1d is used.
  • the elastic member 4 in the insertion hole closed state (that is, the initial state) is slightly bent in the direction in which the fixed portion 42 and the movable portion 43 approach each other. This makes it possible to prevent the elastic member 4 from falling off from the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4 in a non-flexible state is shown by a chain double-dashed line.
  • the operation unit 5 is a substantially columnar or substantially plate-shaped member extending in the vertical direction.
  • the operation unit 5 is located inside a hole portion (hereinafter, referred to as “movement path 24”) extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2.
  • the operation unit 5 can move in the vertical direction along the movement path 24.
  • the movement path 24 opens to the upper surface 25 of the case 2 and extends substantially downward from the upper surface 25.
  • the operation unit 5 includes an upper end portion 51, a connecting portion 52, and a lower end portion 53.
  • the upper end portion 51, the connecting portion 52, and the lower end portion 53 are one-connected members that are connected from the upper side to the lower side in this order.
  • the operation unit 5 is made of resin, for example.
  • the upper end portion 51 of the operation portion 5 is, for example, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped portion.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 is a plane substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction.
  • An operation recess that is recessed downward is provided at the center of the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51.
  • the connecting portion 52 extends downward from the lower end of the upper end portion 51, and connects the upper end portion 51 and the lower end portion 53.
  • the connecting portion 52 is, for example, a substantially plate-shaped portion whose width in the thickness direction is larger than the width in the left-right direction.
  • the lower end 53 extends downward from the lower end of the connecting 52.
  • the lower end portion 53 is, for example, a substantially plate-shaped or substantially columnar portion.
  • the width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the upper end portion 51 in the vertical direction.
  • the width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the connecting portion 52 in the vertical direction.
  • the width of the lower end portion 53 in the left-right direction is substantially constant at the upper portion of the lower end portion 53, and gradually decreases from the upper portion toward the lower side.
  • the width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction.
  • the width of the upper end of the lower end 53 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the lower end of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction.
  • the left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion 52 are substantially perpendicular to the left and right directions, and extend substantially parallel to the vertical direction.
  • the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 projects to the left from the upper end of the connecting portion 52.
  • the left side surface of the lower end portion 53 of the operation unit 5 extends downward substantially parallel to the upper end in the vertical direction, and then goes to the right side as it goes downward.
  • the elastic member 4 partially contacts the left side surface of the lower end 53.
  • the lower end 53 of the operation unit 5 projects to the right from the lower end of the connecting portion 52.
  • an operation step portion 55 projecting to the right is formed at the lower end of the connecting portion 52 (that is, the upper end of the lower end portion 53).
  • the operation step portion 55 of the operation portion 5 is locked to a part of the case 2, so that the movement of the operation portion 5 upward is restricted.
  • the lower end portion 53 of the operation portion 5 is in contact with the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 as described above, and the operation step portion 55 is pressed against the above-mentioned part of the case 2 by the restoring force of the elastic member 4.
  • the operation unit 5 is locked to the case 2, so that the operation unit 5 is prevented from moving upward from the position shown in FIG. 24.
  • the operation unit 5 When assembling the connecting device 1d, the operation unit 5 is first arranged in the region where the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the non-flexible state (that is, the uncompressed state) should exist, and the elastic member 4 Is attached to the case 2 in a bent state. As a result, the above structure is realized.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is located inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 with respect to the area around the operation unit 5.
  • the side surfaces 513 of the operation unit 5 in the thickness direction are located inside the case 2 of the side surfaces 26 in the thickness direction of the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5. , Or, it is located on substantially the same plane as the area. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5.
  • the surface of the operation unit 5 is the surface of the case 2 in the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
  • FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the connecting device 1d cut at the position of XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 24.
  • the case 2 includes a pair of pressing portions 23 located below the operating portion 5.
  • the pair of pressing portions 23 are arranged at positions separated downward from the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the state where the insertion hole is closed.
  • the pair of pressing portions 23 separate a part of both side surfaces 26 in the thickness direction of the case 2 from the surrounding portions except for the upper end 235, and the lower end 236 is closer to each other in the thickness direction. This is the part bent inward.
  • the pair of pressing portions 23 are arranged apart from each other in the thickness direction (that is, the direction perpendicular to the movable region of the movable portion 43).
  • Each pressing portion 23 is a strip-shaped member whose thickness in the thickness direction is smaller than the width in the left-right direction, and extends substantially parallel to the vertical direction.
  • the spacing in the thickness direction of the pair of pressing portions 23 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “the spacing of the pair of pressing portions 23”) gradually decreases toward the bottom.
  • the distance between the pair of pressing portions 23 is larger than the width of the elastic member 4 in the thickness direction at the upper end 235 of the pressing portions 23. Further, the distance between the pair of pressing portions 23 is smaller than the width of the elastic member 4 in the thickness direction at the lower end 236 of the pressing portions 23.
  • Each pressing portion 23 is a resin spring that can be elastically deformed in the thickness direction.
  • the operation unit 5 is pushed toward the inside of the case 2 from the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 24, and moves downward along the movement path 24.
  • a worker brings the tip of a normal flat-blade screwdriver or the like into contact with the operation recess of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5, and points downward to the operation unit 5 via the flat-blade screwdriver. Apply force.
  • the operation unit 5 moves downward, the elastic member 4 bends and the shape of the elastic member 4 is changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the lower end portion 53 of the operating portion 5, and is separated from the terminal portion 3 to the left side. As a result, the lower end of the insertion hole 21 is opened.
  • the state of the connected device 1d shown in FIG. 28 is referred to as an “insertion hole open state”.
  • the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the operating portion 5 from the position shown in FIG. 27 and curved. It passes between the upper ends 235 of the pair of pressing portions 23 (see FIG. 27).
  • the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is located between the upper ends 235 of the pair of pressing portions 23, the movable portion 43 does not come into contact with the pair of pressing portions 23.
  • the movable portion 43 descends between the pair of pressing portions 23, and comes into contact with the pair of pressing portions 23 at a position where the distance between the pair of pressing portions 23 is substantially the same as the width of the movable portion 43 in the thickness direction.
  • the pair of pressing portions 23 come into contact with both side surfaces of the movable portion 43 in the thickness direction from the width direction of the substantially band-shaped movable portion 43. Then, the movable portion 43 is further lowered to open the insertion hole, so that the movable portion 43 is sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions 23 in the thickness direction, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29. At this time, the pair of pressing portions 23 are elastically deformed in the direction in which they are separated from each other in the thickness direction. Further, a frictional resistance is generated between the movable portion 43 and the pair of pressing portions 23 against the restoring force of the elastic member 4 (that is, the force for moving the movable portion 43 upward).
  • the restoring force of the elastic member 4 is partially supported by the pair of pressing portions 23 of the case 2 due to the frictional resistance generated. Therefore, the force of the worker required to maintain the operation unit 5 in the downwardly pushed state is reduced. That is, in the connecting device 1d, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 and the pair of pressing portions 23 constitute a holding force reducing mechanism 60d that reduces the force for maintaining the operating portion 5 in the case 2 in a pushed state.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member 4 supported by the pair of pressing portions 23 is smaller than the total restoring force of the elastic member 4.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member 4 in the open insertion hole state is larger than the frictional resistance generated between the movable portion 43 and the pair of pressing portions 23. Therefore, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is not locked to the pair of pressing portions 23 only by the frictional resistance.
  • the pinching of the movable portion 43 by the pair of pressing portions 23 causes resistance to the hand of the worker holding the flat-blade screwdriver that pushes the operation portion 5. Therefore, the worker can easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state.
  • the lower end of the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5 is provided on the stop surface 242 provided in the movement path 24 of the case 2 and substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction. Contact from above. Thereby, it is possible to limit the excessive movement of the operation unit 5 downward. Further, the operator can more easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state by the response and / or the generation of sound due to the contact between the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 and the stop surface 242. You can also.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 than the area around the operation unit 5. Located on the side).
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 may be located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5.
  • the surface of the operation unit 5 is the surface of the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
  • the elastic member 4 is more bent than the elastic member 4 in the connection state described later, and does not sandwich the electric wire with the terminal portion 3.
  • the insertion hole open state which is the state of the connecting device 1d shown in FIG. 28, is a “non-connection state” in which the pinching of the electric wire between the elastic member 4 and the terminal portion 3 is released.
  • the electric wire 91 is inserted into the insertion hole 21 of the connecting device 1d as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 28.
  • the electric wire 91 may be, for example, a single wire or a stranded wire. Further, the electric wire 91 may be a stranded wire provided with a rod-shaped crimp terminal or the like at the tip end portion.
  • the diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is preferably 0.42 mm or more, for example.
  • the diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is practically 2.3 mm or less.
  • the diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways. Further, the diameter of the portion other than the tip end portion of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways.
  • the electric wire 91 is moved downward in the insertion hole 21 and is inserted between the terminal portion 3 and the elastic member 4 in the insertion hole open state as shown in FIG. After that, the force of the worker pushing the operation unit 5 is weakened, and the restoring force of the elastic member 4 is the frictional resistance generated between the force of the worker and the frictional resistance (that is, between the movable part 43 and the pair of pressing parts 23). ), The movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 moves diagonally upward to the right, and the pair of pressing portions 23 is released from sandwiching the movable portion 43. In other words, the movable portion 43 is separated from the pair of pressing portions 23 and is in a non-contact state.
  • the movable portion 43 contacts the electric wire 91 from the left side.
  • the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3.
  • the electric wire 91 and the terminal portion 3 are electrically and mechanically connected.
  • the electric wire 91 is connected to the connecting device 1d.
  • the state shown in FIG. 31 is referred to as a “connection state”.
  • the elastic member 4 in the connected state sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3.
  • the movable portion 43 is located at a position separated upward from the pair of pressing portions 23, and is not in contact with the pair of pressing portions 23.
  • the operating portion 5 moves upward from the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. 30 due to the movement of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 diagonally upward to the right, and the lower end portion 53 is the elastic member 4. Stops in contact with the movable portion 43 of.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 with respect to the area around the operation unit 5.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 may be located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5.
  • the surface of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24) in the surface of the case 2. It is located or is located substantially in the same plane as the area.
  • the worker can easily recognize that the connected device 1d is in the insertion hole open state (that is, the unconnected state). be able to. Further, it is more easily recognized that the connected device 1d is in the insertion hole open state (that is, the unconnected state) due to the response and / or the generation of sound due to the contact between the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 and the stop surface 242. can do.
  • the elastic member 4 can be deformed between the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 24, the insertion hole open state shown in FIGS. 28 and 30, and the wiring state shown in FIG. 31.
  • the position of the operating portion 5 in contact with the elastic member 4 in the connected state is referred to as a “first position”.
  • the position of the operation unit 5 in contact with the elastic member 4 in the insertion hole open state is referred to as a “second position”.
  • the position of the operation portion 5 in which the operation step portion 55 is locked to a part of the case 2 is referred to as a “third position”.
  • the above-mentioned movement path 24 connects the third position, the first position, and the second position of the operation unit 5 in this order.
  • the third position is located on the movement path 24 on the opposite side of the first position from the second position.
  • the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is sandwiched by the pair of pressing portions 23.
  • the operation step portion 55 is locked to a part of the case 2, so that the upward movement of the operation portion 5 (that is, the movement in the direction away from the second position) is restricted.
  • it is sufficient that a part of the operation unit 5 is locked to a part of the case 2, and the operation step portion 55 does not necessarily have to be locked to a part of the case 2.
  • the connecting device 1d to which the electric wire 91 is connected includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5.
  • the terminal portion 3 is conductive and is fixed to the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4 is attached to the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4 presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91.
  • the operation unit 5 changes the shape of the elastic member 4 by moving along a movement path 24 extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4 is in a connected state in which the electric wire 91 is sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 and a non-connected state in which the electric wire 91 is released from being sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 by being bent more than the connected state (that is,).
  • the operation unit 5 comes into contact with the elastic member 4 in the connected state at the first position.
  • the operating unit 5 deforms the elastic member 4 into a non-wired state by being pushed into the second position below the first position while maintaining the contact state with the elastic member 4.
  • the connected device 1d further includes a holding force reducing mechanism 60d that reduces the force for maintaining the operating unit 5 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 when the operating unit 5 is located at the second position. As a result, the force for maintaining the connected device 1d in the unconnected state can be reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1d can be improved.
  • the elastic member 4 includes a fixed portion 42 fixed to the case 2 and a movable portion 43 extending diagonally downward from the fixed portion 42.
  • the operation unit 5 comes into contact with the movable portion 43, and the movable portion 43 sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3.
  • the non-connected state the movable portion 43 bends downward from the connected state. Thereby, the operability of the connected device 1d can be further improved.
  • the case 2 includes a pair of pressing portions 23.
  • the pair of pressing portions 23 are arranged below the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the connected state, separated in the thickness direction perpendicular to the movable region of the movable portion 43, and extend in the vertical direction. The distance between the pair of pressing portions 23 in the thickness direction becomes smaller toward the bottom.
  • the holding force reducing mechanism 60d includes a movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 and a pair of pressing portions 23. In the state where the operating portion 5 is located at the second position, the movable portion 43 is sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions 23, and resists the restoring force of the elastic member 4 between the movable portion 43 and the pair of pressing portions 23. Friction resistance occurs. As a result, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state) can be reduced by a simple structure. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1d can be easily improved.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member 4 in the unconnected state is preferably larger than the frictional resistance described above. Therefore, when connecting the electric wire 91 to the connected device 1d in the unconnected state, the operation unit 5 can be easily moved from the second position to the first position by relaxing the force for pushing the operation unit 5 downward with a flat-blade screwdriver or the like.
  • the electric wire 91 can be easily sandwiched between the movable portion 43 and the terminal portion 3 of the elastic member 4.
  • the operation unit 5 is similarly moved by a flat-blade screwdriver or the like.
  • the operation unit 5 By loosening the downward pushing force, the operation unit 5 can be easily moved from the second position to the third position. Therefore, it is not necessary to repeatedly insert a flat-blade screwdriver or the like into the movement path 24 when connecting the electric wire 91 or disconnecting the electric wire 91, so that the operability of the connected device 1d can be improved.
  • the elastic member 4 is preferably a leaf spring.
  • the structure of the connected device 1d can be simplified. As a result, the manufacturing of the connected device 1d can be facilitated.
  • convex portions 44 are provided on both side surfaces of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the thickness direction, and the inner side surfaces (that is, movable) of the pair of pressing portions 23 in the thickness direction.
  • a recess 231 may be provided on the surface in contact with the portion 43).
  • Each concave portion 231 fits with the convex portion 44 in a state where the operating portion 5 is located at the above-mentioned second position. As a result, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5 in the case 2 in the pushed state can be further reduced.
  • a concave portion may be provided in the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4, and a convex portion may be provided in the pair of pressing portions 23.
  • one of the movable portion 43 and the pair of pressing portions 23 has a convex portion
  • the other of the movable portion 43 and the pair of pressing portions 23 has the operating portion 5 in the second position. It is preferable to have a concave portion that fits with the convex portion in a positioned state (that is, a non-connected state). As a result, as described above, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state) can be further reduced.
  • the operability of the connected device 1d can be further improved. Even in this case, when the force for pushing the operating portion 5 is relaxed, the operating portion 5 moves upward and the movable portion 43 moves upward to the right due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4.
  • rough surface portions 45 are provided on both side surfaces of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the thickness direction, and the inner surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 23 in the thickness direction ( That is, the rough surface portion 232 may be provided on the surface in contact with the movable portion 43).
  • the rough surface portion 45 and the rough surface portion 232 are regions having a surface roughness larger than that of the surrounding portions, respectively.
  • the connected device 1d it is sufficient that at least one of the side surfaces of the movable portion 43 in the thickness direction and the inner surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 23 has rough surface portions. Even in this case, since the frictional resistance between the movable portion 43 and the pair of pressing portions 23 increases, the force for maintaining the operating portion 5 in the case 2 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state) is applied. It can be further reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1d can be further improved. Even when the frictional resistance is increased, if the force for pushing the operating portion 5 is relaxed, the operating portion 5 moves upward due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4, and the movable portion 43 moves upward to the right. Moving.
  • FIG. 34 is a perspective view of the connecting device 1e according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the connected device 1e.
  • FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view of the connected device 1e cut at the position of XXXVI-XXXVI in FIG. 35.
  • FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the connected device 1e.
  • the connecting device 1e is a push-in type connecting device to which the electric wire 91 is connected.
  • the connected device 1e is used, for example, as a terminal block of a control panel or the like.
  • a thin plate-shaped end plate 11 is attached to the front side of the connecting device 1e. Further, in FIG.
  • a state in which a plurality of connected devices 1e are connected is shown by a two-dot chain line.
  • 35 to 37 show a state in which the electric wire 91 is not inserted into the connecting device 1e.
  • FIG. 35 the configuration on the back side of the cross section is also shown.
  • those corresponding to the configurations of the connected devices 1 shown in FIGS. 1 to 4 are designated by the same reference numerals.
  • FIG. 35 shows a cross section of the connected device 1e at substantially the center in the thickness direction.
  • the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the thickness direction do not necessarily have to coincide with the mounting direction when the connected device 1e is used. Further, the vertical direction does not necessarily have to coincide with the direction of gravity.
  • the connecting device 1e includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5.
  • the case 2 houses the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 inside.
  • the case 2 is made of resin, for example.
  • the case 2 is provided with two insertion holes 21 into which electric wires can be inserted.
  • two terminal portions 3, two elastic members 4, and two operating portions 5 are housed inside the case 2, two terminal portions 3, two elastic members 4, and two operating portions 5 are housed.
  • the connecting device 1e includes two sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5.
  • the connecting device 1e may include one set or three or more sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4, and an operation portion 5.
  • Each set of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 is arranged corresponding to the insertion hole 21.
  • the two sets of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 have the same shape and size, and are arranged in opposite directions. Focusing on the insertion hole 21 on the right side in FIG. 35, the terminal portion 3 is located on the right side of the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21 and extends downward from the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21.
  • the elastic member 4 extends from the lower end of the insertion hole 21 to the left side and further downward.
  • the operation unit 5 is arranged on the left side of the insertion hole 21 and above the elastic member 4.
  • the terminal portion 3 is a conductive member fixed to the case 2.
  • the terminal portion 3 is made of metal, for example.
  • the right terminal portion 3 in FIG. 35 is electrically connected to the left terminal portion 3 in FIG. 35.
  • the two terminal portions 3 are connected members. Specifically, the lower ends of the two terminal portions 3 are connected by a conductive terminal connecting portion 32 extending in the left-right direction.
  • the elastic member 4 is an elastically deformable member attached to the case 2. As shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the elastic member 4 is a substantially strip-shaped leaf spring.
  • the elastic member 4 is made of metal, for example.
  • the elastic member 4 may be formed of a conductive material or an insulating material such as a resin.
  • the elastic member 4 has, for example, a shape that is bent into a substantially L-shape, a substantially V-shape, or a substantially U-shape at the central portion 41 in the longitudinal direction.
  • the elastic member 4 is attached to the case 2 with both ends facing substantially downward by sandwiching the central portion 41 between the cases 2.
  • the portion 22 of the case 2 that contacts the central portion 41 from below is referred to as a “support portion 22”.
  • the support portion 22 extends substantially downward from the central portion 41 of the elastic member 4.
  • the portion 42 of the elastic member 4 extending from the central portion 41 to the left side of the support portion 22 is sandwiched between the support portion 22 and another portion of the case 2. Therefore, it is fixed to the case 2.
  • the portion 43 extending from the central portion 41 to the right side of the support portion 22 is in contact with the terminal portion 3 extending in the vertical direction.
  • the portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the operating portion 5, it elastically deforms with the upper end portion of the support portion 22 as a fulcrum and bends downward. Further, when the downward pressing force on the portion 43 disappears, the portion 43 returns to its original state (that is, elastically returns) due to the restoring force.
  • the portion 42 and the portion 43 of the elastic member 4 will be referred to as a "fixed portion 42” and a “movable portion 43", respectively.
  • the fixed portion 42 and the movable portion 43 are substantially line-symmetrical with respect to the center line passing through the central portion 41.
  • the movable portion 43 extends obliquely downward from the upper end of the fixed portion 42.
  • the insertion hole closed state is a state before the electric wire is inserted into the insertion hole 21, that is, an initial state before the connecting device 1e is used.
  • the elastic member 4 in the insertion hole closed state (that is, the initial state) is slightly bent in the direction in which the fixed portion 42 and the movable portion 43 approach each other. This makes it possible to prevent the elastic member 4 from falling off from the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4 in a non-flexible state is shown by a chain double-dashed line.
  • the operation unit 5 is a substantially columnar or substantially plate-shaped member extending in the vertical direction.
  • the operation unit 5 is located inside a hole portion (hereinafter, referred to as “movement path 24”) extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2.
  • the operation unit 5 can move in the vertical direction along the movement path 24.
  • the movement path 24 opens to the upper surface 25 of the case 2 and extends substantially downward from the upper surface 25.
  • the operation unit 5 includes an upper end portion 51, a connecting portion 52, and a lower end portion 53.
  • the upper end portion 51, the connecting portion 52, and the lower end portion 53 are one-connected members that are connected from the upper side to the lower side in this order.
  • the operation unit 5 is made of resin, for example.
  • the upper end portion 51 of the operation portion 5 is, for example, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped portion.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 is a plane substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction.
  • An operation recess that is recessed downward is provided at the center of the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51.
  • the connecting portion 52 extends downward from the lower end of the upper end portion 51, and connects the upper end portion 51 and the lower end portion 53.
  • the connecting portion 52 is, for example, a substantially plate-shaped portion whose width in the thickness direction is larger than the width in the left-right direction.
  • the lower end 53 extends downward from the lower end of the connecting 52.
  • the lower end portion 53 is, for example, a substantially plate-shaped or substantially columnar portion.
  • the width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the upper end portion 51 in the vertical direction.
  • the width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the connecting portion 52 in the vertical direction.
  • the width of the lower end portion 53 in the left-right direction is substantially constant at the upper portion of the lower end portion 53, and gradually decreases from the upper portion toward the lower side.
  • the width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction.
  • the width of the upper end of the lower end 53 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the lower end of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction.
  • the left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion 52 are substantially perpendicular to the left and right directions, and extend substantially parallel to the vertical direction.
  • the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 projects to the left from the upper end of the connecting portion 52.
  • the left side surface of the lower end portion 53 of the operation unit 5 extends downward substantially parallel to the upper end in the vertical direction, and then goes to the right side as it goes downward.
  • the elastic member 4 partially contacts the left side surface of the lower end 53.
  • the lower end 53 of the operation unit 5 projects to the right from the lower end of the connecting portion 52.
  • an operation step portion 55 projecting to the right is formed at the lower end of the connecting portion 52 (that is, the upper end of the lower end portion 53).
  • the operation step portion 55 of the operation portion 5 is locked to a part of the case 2, so that the movement of the operation portion 5 upward is restricted.
  • the lower end portion 53 of the operation portion 5 is in contact with the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 as described above, and the operation step portion 55 is pressed against the above-mentioned part of the case 2 by the restoring force of the elastic member 4.
  • the operation unit 5 is locked to the case 2, so that the operation unit 5 is prevented from moving upward from the position shown in FIG. 35.
  • the operation unit 5 When assembling the connecting device 1e, the operation unit 5 is first arranged in the region where the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the non-flexible state (that is, the uncompressed state) should exist, and the elastic member 4 Is attached to the case 2 in a bent state. As a result, the above structure is realized.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is located inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 with respect to the area around the operation unit 5.
  • the side surfaces 513 of the operation unit 5 in the thickness direction are located inside the case 2 of the side surfaces 26 in the thickness direction of the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5. , Or, it is located on substantially the same plane as the area. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5.
  • the surface of the operation unit 5 is the surface of the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
  • the case 2 includes a movable end locking portion 23e located below the operating portion 5.
  • the movable end locking portion 23e is a thin plate-shaped member extending substantially in the left-right direction from the lower end portion of the support portion 22 toward the terminal portion 3 vertically below the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4.
  • the vertical thickness of the movable end locking portion 23e is smaller than the length in the horizontal direction.
  • the movable end locking portion 23e is a resin spring that can be elastically deformed in the vertical direction. In the state shown in FIG. 35, the movable end locking portion 23e is located at a position separated downward from the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4.
  • the upper surface 234 of the movable end locking portion 23e is an inclined surface that moves upward as it moves away from the lower end portion of the support portion 22 (that is, as it approaches the terminal portion 3 in the left-right direction).
  • the upper surface 234 of the movable end locking portion 23e extends diagonally upward in a direction approaching the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 as it goes upward.
  • the upper surface 234 of the movable end locking portion 23e is also referred to as an “inclined contact surface 234”.
  • the operation unit 5 is pushed toward the inside of the case 2 from the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 35, and moves downward along the movement path 24.
  • a worker brings the tip of a normal flat-blade screwdriver or the like into contact with the operation recess of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5, and points downward to the operation unit 5 via the flat-blade screwdriver. Apply force.
  • the elastic member 4 bends and the shape of the elastic member 4 is changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the lower end portion 53 of the operating portion 5, and is separated from the terminal portion 3 to the left side. As a result, the lower end of the insertion hole 21 is opened.
  • the state of the connected device 1e shown in FIG. 38 is referred to as an “insertion hole open state”.
  • the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the operating portion 5 and curved, and the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 is bent. It contacts the inclined contact surface 234 of the movable end locking portion 23e. Then, when the movable portion 43 is further pushed by the operating portion 5, the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 moves substantially to the left along the inclined contact surface 234. The movable end locking portion 23e is pressed by the movable portion 43 and elastically deforms downward. A frictional resistance is generated between the lower end of the movable portion 43 and the inclined contact surface 234 against the restoring force of the elastic member 4 (that is, the force for moving the movable portion 43 upward).
  • the restoring force of the elastic member 4 is partially supported by the inclined contact surface 234 of the movable end locking portion 23e due to the frictional resistance. Therefore, the force of the worker required to maintain the operation unit 5 in the downwardly pushed state is reduced. That is, in the connecting device 1e, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 and the inclined contact surface 234 constitute a holding force reducing mechanism 60e that reduces the force for maintaining the operating portion 5 in the case 2 in a pushed state.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member 4 supported by the inclined contact surface 234 is smaller than the total restoring force of the elastic member 4.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member 4 in the open insertion hole state is larger than the frictional resistance generated between the movable portion 43 and the inclined contact surface 234. Therefore, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is not locked to the inclined contact surface 234 only by the frictional resistance.
  • the friction between the lower end of the movable portion 43 and the inclined contact surface 234 causes resistance to the hand of the worker holding the flat-blade screwdriver that pushes the operating portion 5. Therefore, the worker can easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state.
  • the lower end of the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5 is substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction provided in the moving path 24 of the case 2. It contacts the stop surface 242 from above. Thereby, it is possible to limit the excessive movement of the operation unit 5 downward. Further, the operator can more easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state by the response and / or the generation of sound due to the contact between the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 and the stop surface 242. You can also.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 than the area around the operation unit 5. Located on the side).
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 may be located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5.
  • the surface of the operation unit 5 is the surface of the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
  • the elastic member 4 In the state where the insertion hole is opened shown in FIG. 38, the elastic member 4 is more bent than the elastic member 4 in the connected state described later, and does not sandwich the electric wire with the terminal portion 3.
  • the insertion hole open state which is the state of the connecting device 1e shown in FIG. 38, is a “non-connection state” in which the pinching of the electric wire between the elastic member 4 and the terminal portion 3 is released.
  • the electric wire 91 is inserted into the insertion hole 21 of the connecting device 1e as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 38 while the elastic member 4 is maintained in the insertion hole open state.
  • the electric wire 91 may be, for example, a single wire or a stranded wire. Further, the electric wire 91 may be a stranded wire provided with a rod-shaped crimp terminal or the like at the tip end portion.
  • the diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is preferably 0.42 mm or more, for example.
  • the diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is practically 2.3 mm or less.
  • the diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways. Further, the diameter of the portion other than the tip end portion of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways.
  • the electric wire 91 is moved downward in the insertion hole 21 and is inserted between the terminal portion 3 and the elastic member 4 in the insertion hole open state as shown in FIG. 39. After that, the force of the worker pushing the operation unit 5 is weakened, and the restoring force of the elastic member 4 is the force of the worker and the frictional resistance (that is, the frictional resistance generated between the movable part 43 and the inclined contact surface 234). When it becomes larger than the total of, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 moves diagonally upward to the right and is separated upward from the inclined contact surface 234.
  • the movable portion 43 contacts the electric wire 91 from the left side.
  • the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3.
  • the electric wire 91 and the terminal portion 3 are electrically and mechanically connected.
  • the electric wire 91 is connected to the connecting device 1e.
  • the state shown in FIG. 40 is referred to as a “connection state”.
  • the elastic member 4 in the connected state sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3.
  • the movable portion 43 is located at a position separated upward from the inclined contact surface 234 of the movable end locking portion 23e, and is not in contact with the inclined contact surface 234.
  • the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is moved diagonally upward to the right, so that the operating portion 5 moves upward from the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. Stops in contact with the movable portion 43 of.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 with respect to the area around the operation unit 5.
  • the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 may be located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5.
  • the surface of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24) in the surface of the case 2. It is located or is located substantially in the same plane as the area.
  • connection state shown in FIG. 40 when the connecting device 1e is arranged so that the upper side in FIG. 40 is the lower side in the direction of gravity, the operation unit 5 is moved upward in the drawing from the elastic member 4 due to gravity. Separate. Then, the operation step portion 55 of the operation portion 5 is locked to a part of the case 2 as in the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 35, and the upward movement of the operation portion 5 is restricted. Therefore, it is prevented that the operation unit 5 moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 35.
  • the elastic member 4 can be deformed between the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 35, the insertion hole open state shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, and the connection state shown in FIG.
  • the position of the operating portion 5 in contact with the elastic member 4 in the connected state is referred to as a “first position”.
  • the position of the operating portion 5 in contact with the elastic member 4 in the insertion hole open state is referred to as a “second position”.
  • the position of the operation portion 5 in which the operation step portion 55 is locked to a part of the case 2 is referred to as a “third position”.
  • the above-mentioned movement path 24 connects the third position, the first position, and the second position of the operation unit 5 in this order.
  • the third position is located on the movement path 24 on the opposite side of the first position from the second position.
  • the lower end of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 comes into contact with the inclined contact surface 234 of the movable end locking portion 23e.
  • the operation step portion 55 is locked to a part of the case 2, so that the upward movement of the operation portion 5 (that is, the movement in the direction away from the second position) is restricted.
  • it is sufficient that a part of the operation unit 5 is locked to a part of the case 2, and the operation step portion 55 does not necessarily have to be locked to a part of the case 2.
  • the movable end locking portion 23e having the inclined contact surface 234 is a part of the case 2, but the inclined contact surface 234 does not necessarily have to be provided in the case 2, and the case 2 of the connecting device 1e. It may be provided in a portion other than the above.
  • a part of the terminal connecting portion 32 may be cut up to form a conductive movable end locking portion 23f.
  • a substantially rectangular region of the terminal connection unit 32 located in the central portion in the thickness direction is separated from the surrounding portions except for the left end portion, and the right end portion is The left edge of the region is bent to move upwards.
  • the movable end locking portion 23f extending diagonally upward to the right from the terminal connecting portion 32 toward the terminal portion 3 is formed, and the upper surface of the movable end locking portion 23f becomes the inclined contact surface 234f.
  • the inclined contact surface 234f is located at a position separated downward from the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4. ..
  • the non-connected state that is, the insertion hole open state
  • the movable portion 43 comes into contact with the inclined contact surface 234f, and the movable portion 43 A frictional resistance against the restoring force of the elastic member 4 is generated between the surface and the inclined contact surface 234f.
  • the connecting device 1e to which the electric wire 91 is connected includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5.
  • the terminal portion 3 is conductive and is fixed to the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4 is attached to the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4 presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91.
  • the operation unit 5 changes the shape of the elastic member 4 by moving along a movement path 24 extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2.
  • the elastic member 4 is in a connected state in which the electric wire 91 is sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 and a non-connected state in which the electric wire 91 is released from being sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 by being bent more than the connected state (that is,).
  • the operation unit 5 comes into contact with the elastic member 4 in the connected state at the first position.
  • the operating unit 5 deforms the elastic member 4 into a non-wired state by being pushed into the second position below the first position while maintaining the contact state with the elastic member 4.
  • the connected device 1e further includes a holding force reducing mechanism 60e that reduces the force for maintaining the operating unit 5 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 when the operating unit 5 is located at the second position. As a result, the force for maintaining the connected device 1e in the unconnected state can be reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1e can be improved.
  • the elastic member 4 includes a fixed portion 42 fixed to the case 2 and a movable portion 43 extending diagonally downward from the fixed portion 42.
  • the operation unit 5 comes into contact with the movable portion 43, and the movable portion 43 sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3.
  • the non-connected state the movable portion 43 bends downward from the connected state. Thereby, the operability of the connected device 1e can be further improved.
  • the elastic member 4 is preferably a leaf spring.
  • the connecting device 1e further includes an inclined contact surface 234.
  • the inclined contact surface 234 extends obliquely upward in a direction closer to the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 as it goes upward at a position separated downward from the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the connected state.
  • the holding force reducing mechanism 60e includes a movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 and an inclined contact surface 234. In the state where the operating portion 5 is located at the second position, the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 comes into contact with the inclined contact surface 234, and resists the restoring force of the elastic member 4 between the movable portion 43 and the inclined contact surface 234. Friction resistance occurs. As a result, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state) can be reduced by a simple structure. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1e can be easily improved.
  • the restoring force of the elastic member 4 in the unconnected state is preferably larger than the frictional resistance described above. Therefore, when connecting the electric wire 91 to the connected device 1e in the unconnected state, the operation unit 5 can be easily moved from the second position to the first position by relaxing the force for pushing the operation unit 5 downward with a flat-blade screwdriver or the like.
  • the electric wire 91 can be easily sandwiched between the movable portion 43 and the terminal portion 3 of the elastic member 4.
  • the operation unit 5 is similarly moved by a flat-blade screwdriver or the like.
  • the operation unit 5 By loosening the downward pushing force, the operation unit 5 can be easily moved from the second position to the third position. Therefore, it is not necessary to repeatedly insert a flat-blade screwdriver or the like into the movement path 24 when connecting the electric wire 91 or disconnecting the electric wire 91, so that the operability of the connected device 1e can be improved.
  • the recess 231 may be provided on the inclined contact surface 234.
  • the lower end of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is fitted into the recess 231 in a state where the operating portion 5 is located at the above-mentioned second position (that is, in a non-connection state).
  • the force for maintaining the operation unit 5 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 can be further reduced.
  • the operability of the connected device 1e can be further improved. Even in this case, when the force for pushing the operating portion 5 is relaxed, the operating portion 5 moves upward and the movable portion 43 moves upward to the right due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4.
  • a rough surface portion 232 is provided in a region of the inclined contact surface 234 that comes into contact with the lower end portion of the movable portion 43, and the rough surface portion 45 is provided at the lower end portion of the movable portion 43. It may be provided.
  • the rough surface portion 232 and the rough surface portion 45 are regions having a surface roughness larger than that of the surrounding portions, respectively.
  • the region of the inclined contact surface 234 that comes into contact with the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 or the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 has a rough surface portion. Even in this case, since the frictional resistance between the movable portion 43 and the inclined contact surface 234 increases, the force for maintaining the operating portion 5 in the case 2 in the pushed state (that is, the unconnected state) is further increased. It can be reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1e can be further improved. Even when the frictional resistance is increased, when the force for pushing the operating portion 5 is relaxed, the operating portion 5 moves upward and the movable portion 43 moves upward due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4. To do.
  • the shapes of the terminal portion 3, the elastic members 4, 4b, and the operation portions 5, 5a, 5b may be changed in various ways.
  • the elastic member 4 may be a member other than the leaf spring (for example, a string-wound spring).
  • the surface of the operation unit 5 located at the first position, the second position, and the third position may protrude outward from the area around the operation unit 5 on the surface of the case 2.
  • the connected devices 1a, 1d, and 1e the surface of the operation unit 5b located at the first position, the second position, and the third position may protrude outward from the area around the operation unit 5b on the surface of the case 2.
  • the operation unit 5 located at the second position does not necessarily have to be inclined in the left-right direction from the operation unit 5 located at the first position, and is substantially the same as the operation unit 5 located at the first position. It may be a posture. The same applies to the connected device 1a.
  • the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 may be provided with both the above-mentioned convex portions and concave portions that are fitted to each other and the above-mentioned rough surface portion. The same applies to the connected device 1a.
  • both the above-mentioned convex portions and concave portions that are fitted to each other and the above-mentioned rough surface portion are formed on the inner surface of the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operation portion 5b and the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b. It may be provided.
  • the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 and the pair of pressing portions 23 may be provided with both the above-mentioned convex portions and concave portions that are fitted to each other and the above-mentioned rough surface portion.
  • the rough surface portion may be provided on the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 and / or the inclined contact surface 234, and the recessed portion 231 may be provided on the inclined contact surface 234.
  • the position of the first inclined surface 56 on the operation unit 5 and the position of the second inclined surface 241 on the case 2 may be changed in various ways. The same applies to the connected device 1a.
  • the above-mentioned connecting devices 1, 1a, 1b, 1d, 1e may be used for connecting electric wires in various devices.
  • the connected devices 1, 1a, 1b, 1d, 1e may be used as a relay socket, an operation switch, or the like.

Abstract

According to the present invention, an operation unit (5) of a connection device (1) is in contact with an elastic member (4) in a connection state at a first position. The operation unit (5) is pushed into a second position below the first position while maintaining the contact state with the elastic member (4), thereby deforming the elastic member (4) to a non-connection state. The operation unit (5) has a first inclined surface (56) that is inclined downward in a direction away from a center line of a movement path (24). A case (2) has a second inclined surface (241) that is inclined in a vertical direction in parallel to the first inclined surface (56) in the movement path (24). In a state in which the operation unit (5) is located at the first position, the first inclined surface (56) is located at a position separated from the second inclined surface (241) toward the upper side. In a state in which the operation unit (5) is located at the second position, the first inclined surface (56) abuts the second inclined surface (241) from below. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce a force that maintains a state (that is, the non-connection state) in which the operation unit (5) is pushed into the case (2).

Description

接続機器Connected device
 本発明は、電線が接続される接続機器に関する。
[関連出願の参照]
 本願は、2019年4月25日に出願された日本国特許出願JP2019-084135、JP2019-084136、JP2019-084137、および、JP2019-084138からの優先権の利益を主張し、これらの出願の全ての開示は、本願に組み込まれる。
The present invention relates to a connecting device to which an electric wire is connected.
[Refer to related applications]
The present application claims the benefit of priority from Japanese patent applications JP2019-084135, JP2019-08413, JP2019-084337, and JP2019-0843138 filed on April 25, 2019, and all of these applications. The disclosure is incorporated herein by reference.
 従来、制御盤等において電線が接続される接続機器として、いわゆるプッシュイン式の接続機器が利用されている。当該接続機器では、ケースの挿入穴に電線が差し込まれると、ケース内に設けられた板バネにより当該電線が導通端子に押し付けられて電気的に接続される。 Conventionally, so-called push-in type connecting devices have been used as connecting devices to which electric wires are connected in control panels and the like. In the connection device, when the electric wire is inserted into the insertion hole of the case, the electric wire is pressed against the conduction terminal by the leaf spring provided in the case and electrically connected.
 例えば、特許第6224836号公報(文献1)および米国特許第9905943号明細書(文献2)では、ハウジングに対して進退可能な棒状の操作要素を設け、当該操作要素をドライバー等でハウジング内に押し込むことにより、ハウジング内の板バネを弾性変形させて導通端子から離間させる。そして、板バネが導通端子から離間したオープン状態を維持しつつ、板バネと導通端子との間に電線を挿入する。その後、操作要素の押し込みを解除することにより、板バネが弾性復帰して電線を導通端子との間で挟持する。 For example, in Japanese Patent No. 6224836 (Reference 1) and US Pat. No. 9,905,943 (Reference 2), a rod-shaped operating element that can move forward and backward is provided for the housing, and the operating element is pushed into the housing by a screwdriver or the like. As a result, the leaf spring in the housing is elastically deformed and separated from the conductive terminal. Then, the electric wire is inserted between the leaf spring and the conductive terminal while maintaining the open state in which the leaf spring is separated from the conductive terminal. After that, by releasing the pushing of the operating element, the leaf spring elastically returns and sandwiches the electric wire with the conductive terminal.
 しかしながら、文献1および文献2の接続機器では、上述のオープン状態を維持するためには、一方の手でドライバー等を比較的強い力で押し込んだ状態で維持する必要があり、接続機器の操作性があまり高くない。 However, in the connected devices of Documents 1 and 2, in order to maintain the above-mentioned open state, it is necessary to keep the driver or the like pushed in with a relatively strong force with one hand, and the operability of the connected devices is maintained. Is not very expensive.
 そこで、特開2018-116773号公報(文献3)では、操作部をケース内に押し込んだ状態で係止することにより、ドライバー等をケースから抜いて操作部に対する押圧力を解除してもオープン状態を維持することができる技術が提案されている。 Therefore, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-116773 (Reference 3), by locking the operation unit in a state of being pushed into the case, the driver or the like is pulled out of the case to release the pressing force on the operation unit, but the open state is obtained. A technology that can maintain the above has been proposed.
 ところで、文献3の接続機器では、ケースに係止された操作部を元の位置に戻して弾性部材と導通端子との間に電線を挟持させるために、ドライバー等をケース内に再度挿入し、操作部の位置を変更してケースとの係止を解除する必要がある。すなわち、接続機器に対する電線の接続のために、ドライバー等をケース内に2回挿入することが必要になり、接続機器の操作手順が複雑化する可能性がある。このような接続機器を操作する現場では、接続機器の操作性向上を求める声と、操作手順の簡素化を求める声との双方が存在する。 By the way, in the connection device of Document 3, a screwdriver or the like is reinserted into the case in order to return the operation unit locked to the case to the original position and sandwich the electric wire between the elastic member and the conductive terminal. It is necessary to change the position of the operation unit to release the lock with the case. That is, in order to connect the electric wire to the connected device, it is necessary to insert the driver or the like into the case twice, which may complicate the operation procedure of the connected device. In the field of operating such a connected device, there are both a voice requesting improvement in operability of the connected device and a voice requesting simplification of the operation procedure.
 本発明は、電線が接続される接続機器に向けられており、操作部を押し込んだ状態で維持する力を低減することを目的としている。 The present invention is directed to a connecting device to which an electric wire is connected, and an object of the present invention is to reduce the force of maintaining the operation unit in a pushed state.
 本発明の好ましい一の形態に係る接続機器は、ケースと、前記ケースに固定された導電性の端子部と、前記ケースに取り付けられ、復元力により電線を前記端子部に押し付けて挟持する弾性部材と、前記ケースに設けられた上下方向に延びる移動経路に沿って移動することにより前記弾性部材の形状を変更する操作部とを備える。前記弾性部材は、前記電線を前記端子部との間で挟持している結線状態と、前記結線状態よりも撓んで前記端子部との間の前記電線の挟持が解除された非結線状態との間で変形可能である。前記操作部は、第1位置において前記結線状態の前記弾性部材に接触し、前記弾性部材との接触状態を維持しつつ前記第1位置よりも下側の第2位置へと押し込まれることにより、前記弾性部材を前記非結線状態へと変形させる。前記接続機器は、前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態において、前記操作部を前記ケース内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力を低減させる保持力低減機構をさらに備える。当該接続機器によれば、操作部を押し込んだ状態で維持する力を低減することができる。 The connecting device according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention includes a case, a conductive terminal portion fixed to the case, and an elastic member attached to the case and pressing an electric wire against the terminal portion by a restoring force to hold the electric wire. And an operation unit that changes the shape of the elastic member by moving along a moving path extending in the vertical direction provided in the case. The elastic member has a connection state in which the electric wire is sandwiched between the electric wire and the terminal portion and a non-connection state in which the electric wire is released from being sandwiched between the terminal portion by bending more than the connection state. It can be transformed between. The operation unit comes into contact with the elastic member in the connected state at the first position, and is pushed to the second position below the first position while maintaining the contact state with the elastic member. The elastic member is deformed into the unconnected state. The connected device further includes a holding force reducing mechanism that reduces the force for maintaining the operating unit in a state of being pushed into the case when the operating unit is located at the second position. According to the connected device, it is possible to reduce the force for maintaining the operation unit in the pushed state.
 好ましくは、前記操作部は、下方に向かうに従って前記移動経路の中心線から離れる方向に傾斜する第1傾斜面を有する。前記ケースは、前記移動経路内において前記第1傾斜面と平行に上下方向に対して傾斜する第2傾斜面を有する。前記保持力低減機構は、前記第1傾斜面および前記第2傾斜面を備える。前記操作部が前記第1位置に位置する状態では、前記第1傾斜面は前記第2傾斜面から上側に離間した位置に位置する。前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態では、前記第1傾斜面は前記第2傾斜面に下側から当接する。 Preferably, the operating portion has a first inclined surface that inclines in a direction away from the center line of the moving path as it goes downward. The case has a second inclined surface that is inclined in the vertical direction in parallel with the first inclined surface in the movement path. The holding force reducing mechanism includes the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface. In the state where the operating portion is located at the first position, the first inclined surface is located at a position separated upward from the second inclined surface. In the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the first inclined surface comes into contact with the second inclined surface from below.
 好ましくは、前記非結線状態の前記弾性部材の復元力により、前記第1傾斜面が前記第2傾斜面に対して上向きに押圧され、前記第2傾斜面は、前記弾性部材の復元力を部分的に支持する。 Preferably, the restoring force of the elastic member in the non-connected state presses the first inclined surface upward with respect to the second inclined surface, and the second inclined surface partially satisfies the restoring force of the elastic member. Support
 好ましくは、前記第1傾斜面は、前記操作部の上端に設けられる。 Preferably, the first inclined surface is provided at the upper end of the operating portion.
 好ましくは、前記第1傾斜面は、前記操作部の上端部よりも下側に設けられる。 Preferably, the first inclined surface is provided below the upper end portion of the operating portion.
 好ましくは、前記第1傾斜面および前記第2傾斜面のうち一方の面が凸部を有し、前記第1傾斜面および前記第2傾斜面のうち他方の面が、前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態で前記凸部と嵌合する凹部を有する。 Preferably, one of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface has a convex portion, and the other surface of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface has the operating portion the first. It has a concave portion that fits with the convex portion in a state of being located at two positions.
 好ましくは、前記第1傾斜面および前記第2傾斜面のうち少なくとも一方の面が粗面部を有する。 Preferably, at least one of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface has a rough surface portion.
 好ましくは、前記弾性部材が板バネである。 Preferably, the elastic member is a leaf spring.
 好ましくは、前記弾性部材は、上端に位置する折り曲げ部と、前記折り曲げ部の左右両側において下方に延びるとともに下方に向かうに従って左右方向の間隔が大きくなる一対の腕部と、を備える板バネである。前記操作部は、左右方向に離間して配置されて上下方向に延びるとともに、上方に向かうに従って左右方向の間隔が小さくなる、または、左右方向の間隔が一定な一対の押圧部を備える。前記保持力低減機構は、前記一対の腕部および前記一対の押圧部を備える。前記操作部が前記第1位置に位置する状態では、前記一対の押圧部のうち少なくとも一方の下端部が前記一対の腕部のうち少なくとも一方の外側面に接触する。前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態では、前記一対の腕部が左右方向において互いに近づく方向に撓んだ状態で前記一対の押圧部の間に挟持される。 Preferably, the elastic member is a leaf spring including a bent portion located at the upper end and a pair of arm portions extending downward on both left and right sides of the bent portion and increasing the distance in the left-right direction toward the lower end. .. The operation unit includes a pair of pressing units that are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction and extend in the vertical direction, and the distance in the left-right direction becomes smaller toward the upper side, or the distance in the left-right direction is constant. The holding force reducing mechanism includes the pair of arms and the pair of pressing portions. In the state where the operating portion is located at the first position, the lower end portion of at least one of the pair of pressing portions contacts the outer surface of at least one of the pair of arm portions. In the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the pair of arm portions are sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions in a state of being bent in a direction approaching each other in the left-right direction.
 好ましくは、前記非結線状態の前記弾性部材の復元力により、前記一対の押圧部の内側面が前記一対の腕部により左右方向に押圧され、前記一対の押圧部は、前記弾性部材の復元力を部分的に支持する。 Preferably, the restoring force of the elastic member in the non-connected state presses the inner side surfaces of the pair of pressing portions in the left-right direction by the pair of arms, and the pair of pressing portions exerts the restoring force of the elastic member. Partially support.
 好ましくは、前記一対の押圧部および前記一対の腕部のうち一方が凸部を有し、前記一対の押圧部および前記一対の腕部のうち他方が、前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態で前記凸部と嵌合する凹部を有する。 Preferably, one of the pair of pressing portions and the pair of arms has a convex portion, and the other of the pair of pressing portions and the pair of arms has the operating portion located at the second position. It has a concave portion that fits with the convex portion in the state of being
 好ましくは、前記一対の押圧部の内側面、および、前記一対の腕部の前記外側面のうち少なくとも一方の面が粗面部を有する。 Preferably, at least one of the inner side surfaces of the pair of pressing portions and the outer surfaces of the pair of arm portions has a rough surface portion.
 好ましくは、前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態では、前記一対の腕部の成す角度は、0°よりも大きくかつ180°よりも小さい。 Preferably, in the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the angle formed by the pair of arms is larger than 0 ° and smaller than 180 °.
 好ましくは、前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態では、前記一対の腕部の下端は、前記一対の押圧部の下端よりも下側に位置する。 Preferably, in the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the lower ends of the pair of arms are located below the lower ends of the pair of pressing portions.
 好ましくは、前記弾性部材は、前記ケースに固定される固定部と、前記固定部から斜め下方に延びる可動部と、を備える。前記結線状態では、前記操作部が前記可動部に接触し、前記可動部が前記電線を前記端子部との間で挟持する。前記非結線状態では、前記可動部が前記結線状態よりも下方に撓む。 Preferably, the elastic member includes a fixed portion fixed to the case and a movable portion extending obliquely downward from the fixed portion. In the connection state, the operating portion contacts the movable portion, and the movable portion sandwiches the electric wire with the terminal portion. In the unconnected state, the movable portion bends downward from the connected state.
 好ましくは、前記ケースは、前記結線状態の前記弾性部材の前記可動部の下方において、前記可動部の可動領域に垂直な厚さ方向に離間して配置されて上下方向に延びるとともに、下方に向かうに従って厚さ方向の間隔が小さくなる一対の押圧部を備える。前記保持力低減機構は、前記弾性部材の前記可動部および前記一対の押圧部を備える。前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態では、前記可動部が前記一対の押圧部の間に挟持され、前記可動部と前記一対の押圧部との間に、前記弾性部材の復元力に抗する摩擦抵抗が生じる。 Preferably, the case is arranged below the movable portion of the elastic member in the connected state, separated in a thickness direction perpendicular to the movable region of the movable portion, extends in the vertical direction, and moves downward. It is provided with a pair of pressing portions in which the interval in the thickness direction decreases accordingly. The holding force reducing mechanism includes the movable portion of the elastic member and the pair of pressing portions. In the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the movable portion is sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions, and the restoring force of the elastic member is applied between the movable portion and the pair of pressing portions. Friction resistance to resist occurs.
 好ましくは、前記非結線状態の前記弾性部材の復元力は前記摩擦抵抗よりも大きい。 Preferably, the restoring force of the elastic member in the unconnected state is larger than the frictional resistance.
 好ましくは、前記可動部および前記一対の押圧部のうち一方が凸部を有し、前記可動部および前記一対の押圧部のうち他方が、前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態で前記凸部と嵌合する凹部を有する。 Preferably, one of the movable portion and the pair of pressing portions has a convex portion, and the other of the movable portion and the pair of pressing portions has the operating portion located at the second position. It has a concave part that fits with the convex part.
 好ましくは、前記一対の押圧部の内側面、および、厚さ方向における前記可動部の両側面のうち、少なくとも一の面が粗面部を有する。 Preferably, at least one of the inner side surfaces of the pair of pressing portions and both side surfaces of the movable portion in the thickness direction has a rough surface portion.
 好ましくは、前記弾性部材が板バネである。 Preferably, the elastic member is a leaf spring.
 好ましくは、前記弾性部材は板バネである。前記接続機器は、前記結線状態の前記弾性部材の前記可動部から下方に離間した位置において、上方に向かうに従って前記可動部の下端部に近づく方向へと斜め上方に延びる傾斜接触面をさらに備える。前記保持力低減機構は、前記弾性部材の前記可動部および前記傾斜接触面を備える。前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態では、前記可動部の前記下端部が前記傾斜接触面に接触し、前記可動部と前記傾斜接触面との間に、前記弾性部材の復元力に抗する摩擦抵抗が生じる。 Preferably, the elastic member is a leaf spring. The connecting device further includes an inclined contact surface that extends diagonally upward toward the lower end of the movable portion as it goes upward at a position that is separated downward from the movable portion of the elastic member in the connected state. The holding force reducing mechanism includes the movable portion of the elastic member and the inclined contact surface. In the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the lower end portion of the movable portion comes into contact with the inclined contact surface, and the restoring force of the elastic member is applied between the movable portion and the inclined contact surface. Friction resistance to resist occurs.
 好ましくは、前記非結線状態の前記弾性部材の復元力は前記摩擦抵抗よりも大きい。 Preferably, the restoring force of the elastic member in the unconnected state is larger than the frictional resistance.
 好ましくは、前記傾斜接触面が凹部を有し、前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態で前記可動部の前記下端部が前記凹部と嵌合する。 Preferably, the lower end of the movable portion fits with the recess in a state where the inclined contact surface has a recess and the operating portion is located at the second position.
 好ましくは、前記傾斜接触面のうち前記可動部の前記下端部と接触する領域、または、前記可動部の前記下端部は、粗面部を有する。 Preferably, the region of the inclined contact surface that comes into contact with the lower end portion of the movable portion, or the lower end portion of the movable portion has a rough surface portion.
 上述の目的および他の目的、特徴、態様および利点は、添付した図面を参照して以下に行うこの発明の詳細な説明により明らかにされる。 The above-mentioned purpose and other purposes, features, embodiments and advantages will be clarified by the detailed description of the invention described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
第1の実施の形態に係る接続機器の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the connection device which concerns on 1st Embodiment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の分解斜視図である。It is an exploded perspective view of the connected device. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の一部を拡大して示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の一部を拡大して示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. 接続機器の一部を拡大して示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. 第2の実施の形態に係る接続機器の一部を拡大して示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the part of the connection device which concerns on 2nd Embodiment enlarged. 接続機器の一部を拡大して示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. 第3の実施の形態に係る接続機器の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the connection device which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の一部を拡大して示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. 接続機器の一部を拡大して示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. 接続機器の一部を拡大して示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. 第4の実施の形態に係る接続機器の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the connection device which concerns on 4th Embodiment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の分解斜視図である。It is an exploded perspective view of the connected device. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の一部を拡大して示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. 接続機器の一部を拡大して示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. 第5の実施の形態に係る接続機器の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the connection device which concerns on 5th Embodiment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の分解斜視図である。It is an exploded perspective view of the connected device. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of connected equipment. 接続機器の一部を拡大して示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. 接続機器の一部を拡大して示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged. 接続機器の一部を拡大して示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the part of connected equipment enlarged.
 図1は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る接続機器1の斜視図である。図2は、接続機器1の断面図である。図3は、接続機器1を図2中のIII-IIIの位置にて切断した断面図である。図4は、接続機器1の分解斜視図である。接続機器1は、電線91が接続されるプッシュイン式の接続機器である。接続機器1は、例えば、制御盤等の端子台に利用される。図1では、接続機器1の手前側に薄板状のエンドプレート11が取り付けられている。また、図1では、複数の接続機器1が連結された状態を二点鎖線にて示す。図2ないし図4では、電線91が接続機器1に挿入されていない状態を示す。図2では、断面よりも奥側の構成についても併せて図示している。 FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the connecting device 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the connected device 1. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the connecting device 1 cut at the positions III-III in FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the connected device 1. The connecting device 1 is a push-in type connecting device to which the electric wire 91 is connected. The connecting device 1 is used, for example, as a terminal block such as a control panel. In FIG. 1, a thin plate-shaped end plate 11 is attached to the front side of the connecting device 1. Further, in FIG. 1, a state in which a plurality of connected devices 1 are connected is shown by a two-dot chain line. 2 to 4 show a state in which the electric wire 91 is not inserted into the connecting device 1. In FIG. 2, the configuration on the back side of the cross section is also shown.
 以下の説明では、図2中の上下方向および左右方向を、単に「上下方向」および「左右方向」とも呼ぶ。また、図2において紙面に垂直な方向を「厚さ方向」とも呼ぶ。図2は、接続機器1の厚さ方向の略中央における断面を示す。当該上下方向、左右方向および厚さ方向は、接続機器1が使用される際の取付方向とは必ずしも一致する必要はない。また、当該上下方向は、重力方向とも必ずしも一致する必要はない。 In the following description, the vertical direction and the horizontal direction in FIG. 2 are also simply referred to as "vertical direction" and "horizontal direction". Further, in FIG. 2, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface is also referred to as a "thickness direction". FIG. 2 shows a cross section of the connected device 1 at substantially the center in the thickness direction. The vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the thickness direction do not necessarily have to coincide with the mounting direction when the connecting device 1 is used. Further, the vertical direction does not necessarily have to coincide with the direction of gravity.
 接続機器1は、ケース2と、端子部3と、弾性部材4と、操作部5とを備える。ケース2は、端子部3、弾性部材4および操作部5を内部に収容する。ケース2は、例えば樹脂製である。図2に示す例では、ケース2には、それぞれに電線が挿入可能な2つの挿入穴21が設けられる。また、ケース2の内部には、2つの端子部3と、2つの弾性部材4と、2つの操作部5とが収容されている。換言すれば、接続機器1は、2セットの端子部3、弾性部材4および操作部5を備える。なお、接続機器1は、1セットまたは3セット以上の端子部3、弾性部材4および操作部5を備えていてもよい。 The connecting device 1 includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5. The case 2 houses the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 inside. The case 2 is made of resin, for example. In the example shown in FIG. 2, the case 2 is provided with two insertion holes 21 into which electric wires can be inserted. Further, inside the case 2, two terminal portions 3, two elastic members 4, and two operating portions 5 are housed. In other words, the connecting device 1 includes two sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5. The connecting device 1 may include one set or three or more sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4, and an operation portion 5.
 端子部3、弾性部材4および操作部5の各セットは、挿入穴21に対応して配置される。2セットの端子部3、弾性部材4および操作部5は、形状および大きさ等は互いに同じであり、左右反対向きに配置される。図2中の右側の挿入穴21に注目すると、端子部3は、挿入穴21の下端部の右側に位置し、挿入穴21の下端部から下方に延びる。弾性部材4は、挿入穴21の下端部から左側へと延び、さらに下方へと延びる。操作部5は、挿入穴21の左側において、弾性部材4の上側に配置される。 Each set of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 is arranged corresponding to the insertion hole 21. The two sets of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 have the same shape and size, and are arranged in opposite directions. Focusing on the insertion hole 21 on the right side in FIG. 2, the terminal portion 3 is located on the right side of the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21 and extends downward from the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21. The elastic member 4 extends from the lower end of the insertion hole 21 to the left side and further downward. The operation unit 5 is arranged on the left side of the insertion hole 21 and above the elastic member 4.
 端子部3は、ケース2に固定された導電性の部材である。端子部3は、例えば金属製である。図2中の右側の端子部3は、図2中の左側の端子部3と電気的に接続されている。図2ないし図4に示す例では、当該2つの端子部3は一繋がりの部材である。具体的には、2つの端子部3の下端部が、左右方向に延びる導電性の端子接続部32により接続されている。 The terminal portion 3 is a conductive member fixed to the case 2. The terminal portion 3 is made of metal, for example. The right terminal portion 3 in FIG. 2 is electrically connected to the left terminal portion 3 in FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the two terminal portions 3 are one connected member. Specifically, the lower ends of the two terminal portions 3 are connected by a conductive terminal connecting portion 32 extending in the left-right direction.
 弾性部材4は、ケース2に取り付けられた弾性変形可能な部材である。図2ないし図4に示す例では、弾性部材4は、略帯状の板バネである。弾性部材4は、例えば金属製である。弾性部材4は、導電材料により形成されてもよく、樹脂等の絶縁材料により形成されてもよい。弾性部材4は、例えば、長手方向の中央部41にて略L字状、略V字状または略U字状に折り曲げられた形状を有する。弾性部材4は、中央部41をケース2により挟まれることにより、両端部を略下側に向けた状態でケース2に取り付けられる。以下の説明では、ケース2のうち中央部41に下側から接する部位22を、「支持部22」と呼ぶ。支持部22は、弾性部材4の中央部41から略下方に延びる。 The elastic member 4 is an elastically deformable member attached to the case 2. In the example shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the elastic member 4 is a substantially strip-shaped leaf spring. The elastic member 4 is made of metal, for example. The elastic member 4 may be formed of a conductive material or an insulating material such as a resin. The elastic member 4 has, for example, a shape that is bent into a substantially L-shape, a substantially V-shape, or a substantially U-shape at the central portion 41 in the longitudinal direction. The elastic member 4 is attached to the case 2 with both ends facing substantially downward by sandwiching the central portion 41 between the cases 2. In the following description, the portion 22 of the case 2 that contacts the central portion 41 from below is referred to as a “support portion 22”. The support portion 22 extends substantially downward from the central portion 41 of the elastic member 4.
 図2中の右側の弾性部材4に注目すると、当該弾性部材4のうち、中央部41から支持部22の左側に延びる部位42は、支持部22とケース2の他の部位との間に挟まれることにより、ケース2に固定されている。また、当該弾性部材4のうち、中央部41から支持部22の右側に延びる部位43は、上下方向に延びる端子部3に接触している。弾性部材4の部位43は、操作部5により下方に押されることにより、支持部22の上端部を支点として弾性変形して下向きに撓む。また、当該部位43に対する下向きの押圧力がなくなると、部位43は復元力により元の状態に戻る(すなわち、弾性復帰する)。以下の説明では、弾性部材4の部位42および部位43をそれぞれ、「固定部42」および「可動部43」と呼ぶ。固定部42と可動部43とは、中央部41を通る中心線に対して略線対称である。可動部43は、固定部42の上端から斜め下方に延びる。 Focusing on the elastic member 4 on the right side in FIG. 2, the portion 42 of the elastic member 4 extending from the central portion 41 to the left side of the support portion 22 is sandwiched between the support portion 22 and another portion of the case 2. Therefore, it is fixed to the case 2. Further, among the elastic members 4, the portion 43 extending from the central portion 41 to the right side of the support portion 22 is in contact with the terminal portion 3 extending in the vertical direction. When the portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the operating portion 5, it elastically deforms with the upper end portion of the support portion 22 as a fulcrum and bends downward. Further, when the downward pressing force on the portion 43 disappears, the portion 43 returns to its original state (that is, elastically returns) due to the restoring force. In the following description, the portion 42 and the portion 43 of the elastic member 4 will be referred to as a "fixed portion 42" and a "movable portion 43", respectively. The fixed portion 42 and the movable portion 43 are substantially line-symmetrical with respect to the center line passing through the central portion 41. The movable portion 43 extends obliquely downward from the upper end of the fixed portion 42.
 図2に示す状態では、弾性部材4の可動部43の先端が、上述のように、挿入穴21よりも下側において端子部3に接触し、挿入穴21の下端部を下側から閉鎖している。以下の説明では、図2に示す状態を「挿入穴閉鎖状態」と呼ぶ。また、挿入穴閉鎖状態は、挿入穴21に電線が挿入される前の状態、すなわち、接続機器1が使用される前の初期状態である。 In the state shown in FIG. 2, the tip of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 contacts the terminal portion 3 below the insertion hole 21 as described above, and the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21 is closed from below. ing. In the following description, the state shown in FIG. 2 is referred to as an “insertion hole closed state”. The insertion hole closed state is a state before the electric wire is inserted into the insertion hole 21, that is, an initial state before the connecting device 1 is used.
 挿入穴閉鎖状態(すなわち、初期状態)の弾性部材4は、固定部42と可動部43とが近づく向きに少し撓んでいる。これにより、弾性部材4がケース2から脱落することを防止することができる。なお、図2中の左側には、撓みの無い状態の弾性部材4を二点鎖線にて示す。また、図2に示す例では、ケース2の支持部22が、固定部42と可動部43とが近づく向きの弾性部材4の撓み(すなわち、弾性部材4の屈曲)を制限するストッパの役割を果たす。 The elastic member 4 in the insertion hole closed state (that is, the initial state) is slightly bent in the direction in which the fixed portion 42 and the movable portion 43 approach each other. This makes it possible to prevent the elastic member 4 from falling off from the case 2. In addition, on the left side in FIG. 2, the elastic member 4 in a state without bending is shown by a chain double-dashed line. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 2, the support portion 22 of the case 2 serves as a stopper that limits the bending of the elastic member 4 (that is, the bending of the elastic member 4) in the direction in which the fixed portion 42 and the movable portion 43 approach each other. Fulfill.
 操作部5は、上下方向に延びる略柱状または略板状の部材である。操作部5は、ケース2に設けられた上下方向に延びる穴部(以下、「移動経路24」と呼ぶ。)の内部に位置する。操作部5は、移動経路24に沿って上下方向に移動可能である。移動経路24は、ケース2の上面25に開口し、当該上面25から略下方に延びる。 The operation unit 5 is a substantially columnar or substantially plate-shaped member extending in the vertical direction. The operation unit 5 is located inside a hole portion (hereinafter, referred to as “movement path 24”) extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2. The operation unit 5 can move in the vertical direction along the movement path 24. The movement path 24 opens to the upper surface 25 of the case 2 and extends substantially downward from the upper surface 25.
 操作部5は、上端部51と、連結部52と、下端部53とを備える。上端部51、連結部52および下端部53は、この順序で上側から下側に向かって繋がる一繋がりの部材である。操作部5は、例えば樹脂製である。操作部5の上端部51は、例えば略直方体状の部位である。上端部51の上面511は、上下方向に略垂直な平面である。上端部51の上面511の中央部には、下向きに凹む操作凹部が設けられる。連結部52は、上端部51の下端から下方に延び、上端部51と下端部53とを連結する。連結部52は、例えば、厚さ方向の幅が左右方向の幅よりも大きい略板状の部位である。下端部53は、連結部52の下端から下方に延びる。下端部53は、例えば、略板状または略柱状の部位である。 The operation unit 5 includes an upper end portion 51, a connecting portion 52, and a lower end portion 53. The upper end portion 51, the connecting portion 52, and the lower end portion 53 are one-connected members that are connected from the upper side to the lower side in this order. The operation unit 5 is made of resin, for example. The upper end portion 51 of the operation portion 5 is, for example, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped portion. The upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 is a plane substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction. An operation recess that is recessed downward is provided at the center of the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51. The connecting portion 52 extends downward from the lower end of the upper end portion 51, and connects the upper end portion 51 and the lower end portion 53. The connecting portion 52 is, for example, a substantially plate-shaped portion whose width in the thickness direction is larger than the width in the left-right direction. The lower end 53 extends downward from the lower end of the connecting 52. The lower end portion 53 is, for example, a substantially plate-shaped or substantially columnar portion.
 上端部51の左右方向の幅は、上端部51の上下方向の略全長に亘って略一定である。連結部52の左右方向の幅は、連結部52の上下方向の略全長に亘って略一定である。下端部53の左右方向の幅は、下端部53の上部において略一定であり、当該上部から下方に向かうに従って漸次減少する。上端部51の左右方向の幅は、連結部52の左右方向の幅よりも大きい。下端部53の上端の左右方向の幅は、連結部52の下端の左右方向の幅よりも大きい。連結部52の左右両側の側面は、左右方向に略垂直であり、上下方向に略平行に延びる。 The width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the upper end portion 51 in the vertical direction. The width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the connecting portion 52 in the vertical direction. The width of the lower end portion 53 in the left-right direction is substantially constant at the upper portion of the lower end portion 53, and gradually decreases from the upper portion toward the lower side. The width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction. The width of the upper end of the lower end 53 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the lower end of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction. The left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion 52 are substantially perpendicular to the left and right directions, and extend substantially parallel to the vertical direction.
 図2中の右側の操作部5に注目すると、当該操作部5の上端部51は、連結部52の上端から左側に突出する。上端部51の左側の上端部には、上面511から左斜め下方へと向かう第1傾斜面56が設けられる。換言すれば、第1傾斜面56は、下方に向かうに従って移動経路24の中心線(すなわち、左右方向および厚さ方向における移動経路24の略中心を通って上下方向に延びる直線)から離れる方向に傾斜する面である。図2に示す例では、操作部5の第1傾斜面56と上面511との成す角度は、約45°である。当該角度は、0°よりも大きく、かつ、90°よりも小さい。 Focusing on the operation unit 5 on the right side in FIG. 2, the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 projects to the left from the upper end of the connecting portion 52. A first inclined surface 56 extending diagonally downward to the left from the upper surface 511 is provided at the upper left end portion of the upper end portion 51. In other words, the first inclined surface 56 is oriented downward away from the center line of the movement path 24 (that is, a straight line extending in the vertical direction through the substantially center of the movement path 24 in the left-right direction and the thickness direction). It is an inclined surface. In the example shown in FIG. 2, the angle formed by the first inclined surface 56 of the operation unit 5 and the upper surface 511 is about 45 °. The angle is greater than 0 ° and less than 90 °.
 操作部5の下端部53の左側の側面は、上端から上下方向に略平行に下方へと延び、その後、下方に向かうに従って右側へと向かう。弾性部材4は、下端部53の左側の側面と部分的に接触する。操作部5の下端部53は、連結部52の下端から右側に突出する。これにより、連結部52の下端(すなわち、下端部53の上端)に、右側へと突出する操作段差部55が形成される。 The left side surface of the lower end 53 of the operation unit 5 extends downward substantially parallel to the upper end in the vertical direction, and then moves downward to the right. The elastic member 4 partially contacts the left side surface of the lower end 53. The lower end 53 of the operation unit 5 projects to the right from the lower end of the connecting portion 52. As a result, an operation step portion 55 projecting to the right is formed at the lower end of the connecting portion 52 (that is, the upper end of the lower end portion 53).
 図2に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態では、操作部5の操作段差部55がケース2の一部に係止することにより、操作部5の上方への移動が制限される。操作部5の下端部53は、上述のように弾性部材4の可動部43に接触しており、弾性部材4の復元力により、操作段差部55がケース2の上記一部に押し付けられる。これにより、操作部5がケース2に係止されるため、操作部5が図2に示す位置よりも上側へと移動することが防止される。接続機器1を組み立てる際には、操作部5は、撓んでいない状態(すなわち、非圧縮状態)の弾性部材4の可動部43が存在するはずの領域に先に配置されており、弾性部材4は、撓んだ状態でケース2に取り付けられる。これにより、上記構造が実現される。 In the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 2, the operation step portion 55 of the operation portion 5 is locked to a part of the case 2, so that the movement of the operation portion 5 upward is restricted. The lower end portion 53 of the operation portion 5 is in contact with the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 as described above, and the operation step portion 55 is pressed against the above-mentioned part of the case 2 by the restoring force of the elastic member 4. As a result, the operation unit 5 is locked to the case 2, so that the operation unit 5 is prevented from moving upward from the position shown in FIG. When assembling the connecting device 1, the operating portion 5 is first arranged in the region where the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the non-flexible state (that is, the uncompressed state) should exist, and the elastic member 4 is assembled. Is attached to the case 2 in a bent state. As a result, the above structure is realized.
 図2に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態では、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域と略同一平面上に位置する。あるいは、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部(すなわち、当該領域よりも下側)に位置する。また、図3に示すように、操作部5の厚さ方向の両側面513は、ケース2の厚さ方向の両側面26のうち操作部5の周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。操作部5の他の表面についても同様である。換言すれば、図2に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態では、操作部5の表面は、ケース2の表面のうち操作部5の周囲の領域(すなわち、移動経路24の周囲の領域)よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。 In the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 2, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation portion 5 is located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation portion 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. Alternatively, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is located inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 with respect to the area around the operation unit 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the side surfaces 513 of the operation unit 5 in the thickness direction are located inside the case 2 of the side surfaces 26 in the thickness direction of the case 2 with respect to the area around the operation unit 5. , Or, it is located on substantially the same plane as the area. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5. In other words, in the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 2, the surface of the operation unit 5 is the surface of the case 2 in the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
 ケース2には、図2に示す操作部5の上面511よりも下方の移動経路24内において、第1傾斜面56と略平行に上下方向に対して傾斜する第2傾斜面241が設けられる。図2中の右側の移動経路24では、第2傾斜面241は、操作部5の上端部51の左側に位置し、下方に向かうに従って上端部51から離れる方向(すなわち、左斜め下方)に延びる。移動経路24の左右方向の幅は、第2傾斜面241の位置において、下方に向かうに従って漸次増大する。図2に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態では、第2傾斜面241は、第1傾斜面56から下側に離間した位置に位置する。図2中の左側の移動経路24では、第2傾斜面241は、右斜め下方に延びる。 The case 2 is provided with a second inclined surface 241 that is inclined in the vertical direction substantially parallel to the first inclined surface 56 in the movement path 24 below the upper surface 511 of the operation unit 5 shown in FIG. In the movement path 24 on the right side in FIG. 2, the second inclined surface 241 is located on the left side of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5, and extends in a direction away from the upper end portion 51 (that is, diagonally downward to the left) as it goes downward. .. The width of the movement path 24 in the left-right direction gradually increases as it goes downward at the position of the second inclined surface 241. In the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 2, the second inclined surface 241 is located at a position separated downward from the first inclined surface 56. In the movement path 24 on the left side in FIG. 2, the second inclined surface 241 extends diagonally downward to the right.
 次に、接続機器1に対する電線の接続の流れについて、図2、図5ないし図8を参照しつつ説明する。なお、以下では、図中の右側の挿入穴21に電線を接続する際の様子について説明する。図中の左側の挿入穴21に電線を接続する場合については、左右反対向きである点を除き、作業員の動作は略同様である。 Next, the flow of connecting the electric wire to the connecting device 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2, 5 to 8. In the following, a state when the electric wire is connected to the insertion hole 21 on the right side in the drawing will be described. When the electric wire is connected to the insertion hole 21 on the left side in the drawing, the operation of the worker is substantially the same except that the directions are opposite to each other.
 まず、図2に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態から操作部5がケース2の内部に向かって押し込まれ、移動経路24に沿って下方へと移動する。操作部5が押し込まれる際には、例えば、作業員が通常のマイナスドライバー等の先端を、操作部5の上端部51の操作凹部に接触させ、当該マイナスドライバーを介して操作部5に下向きの力を加える。操作部5の下方への移動に従って、弾性部材4は撓んで弾性部材4の形状が変更される。具体的には、図5に示すように、弾性部材4の可動部43が、操作部5の下端部53により下方へと押し下げられ、端子部3から左側へと離間する。これにより、挿入穴21の下端部が開放される。以下の説明では、図5に示す接続機器1の状態を「挿入穴開放状態」という。 First, the operation unit 5 is pushed toward the inside of the case 2 from the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 2, and moves downward along the movement path 24. When the operation unit 5 is pushed in, for example, a worker brings the tip of a normal flat-blade screwdriver or the like into contact with the operation recess of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5, and points downward to the operation unit 5 via the flat-blade screwdriver. Apply force. As the operation unit 5 moves downward, the elastic member 4 bends and the shape of the elastic member 4 is changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the lower end portion 53 of the operating portion 5, and is separated from the terminal portion 3 to the left side. As a result, the lower end of the insertion hole 21 is opened. In the following description, the state of the connected device 1 shown in FIG. 5 is referred to as an “insertion hole open state”.
 図2に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態から図5に示す挿入穴開放状態への移行時には、操作部5が弾性部材4との接触を維持しつつ下方へと移動し、操作部5の第1傾斜面56とケース2の第2傾斜面241とが上下方向の略同じ位置に位置する。このとき、弾性部材4の復元力により操作部5の下端部53が右向きに押されて操作部5が僅かに傾く。具体的には、操作部5の下端部53は、移動経路24と交差する方向である右向きに移動し、操作部5の上端部51は、移動経路24と交差する方向である左向きに移動する。これにより、操作部5の第1傾斜面56は、ケース2の第2傾斜面241に接触しつつ左向きに移動し、第2傾斜面241の下側に位置する。 At the time of transition from the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 2 to the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. 5, the operating portion 5 moves downward while maintaining contact with the elastic member 4, and the first inclined surface of the operating portion 5 The 56 and the second inclined surface 241 of the case 2 are located at substantially the same position in the vertical direction. At this time, the restoring force of the elastic member 4 pushes the lower end portion 53 of the operation portion 5 to the right, and the operation portion 5 is slightly tilted. Specifically, the lower end 53 of the operation unit 5 moves to the right, which is the direction intersecting the movement path 24, and the upper end 51 of the operation unit 5 moves to the left, which is the direction intersecting the movement path 24. .. As a result, the first inclined surface 56 of the operation unit 5 moves to the left while being in contact with the second inclined surface 241 of the case 2, and is located below the second inclined surface 241.
 第2傾斜面241は、上述の僅かに傾いた状態の操作部5における第1傾斜面56と略平行になるように形成されている。ただし、操作部5の当該傾きは僅かであるため、操作部5が傾いていない状態であっても、第2傾斜面241は第1傾斜面56と略平行である。 The second inclined surface 241 is formed so as to be substantially parallel to the first inclined surface 56 in the operation unit 5 in the slightly inclined state described above. However, since the inclination of the operation unit 5 is slight, the second inclined surface 241 is substantially parallel to the first inclined surface 56 even when the operation unit 5 is not tilted.
 図6は、この状態の第1傾斜面56および第2傾斜面241近傍の部位を拡大して示す断面図である。第1傾斜面56は、弾性部材4の復元力により第2傾斜面241に対して下側から当接して上向きに押圧される。これにより、ケース2の第2傾斜面241が、弾性部材4の復元力を部分的に支持する。したがって、操作部5を下向きに押し込んだ状態で維持するために必要な作業員の力が軽減される。すなわち、接続機器1では、第1傾斜面56および第2傾斜面241により、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力を低減させる保持力低減機構60が構成される。なお、第2傾斜面241により支持される弾性部材4の復元力は、弾性部材4の全復元力よりも小さい。したがって、第2傾斜面241による支持のみにより、操作部5が第2傾斜面241に係止されることはない。 FIG. 6 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion in the vicinity of the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 in this state. The first inclined surface 56 is brought into contact with the second inclined surface 241 from below by the restoring force of the elastic member 4 and is pressed upward. As a result, the second inclined surface 241 of the case 2 partially supports the restoring force of the elastic member 4. Therefore, the force of the worker required to maintain the operation unit 5 in the downwardly pushed state is reduced. That is, in the connecting device 1, the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 constitute a holding force reducing mechanism 60 that reduces the force for maintaining the operation unit 5 in the case 2 in a pushed state. The restoring force of the elastic member 4 supported by the second inclined surface 241 is smaller than the total restoring force of the elastic member 4. Therefore, the operation unit 5 is not locked to the second inclined surface 241 only by the support by the second inclined surface 241.
 接続機器1では、操作部5の上述の傾斜(すなわち、上端部51の左側への移動)は短時間のうちに行われ、マイナスドライバーを握る作業員の手に、当該傾斜に起因する手応え(いわゆる、クリック感)が発生する。また、操作部5の当該傾斜に起因する音(例えば、コツンっという衝突音)も発生する。したがって、作業員は、挿入穴閉鎖状態から挿入穴開放状態への移行完了を容易に認識することができる。 In the connected device 1, the above-mentioned inclination of the operation unit 5 (that is, the movement of the upper end portion 51 to the left side) is performed in a short time, and the operator holding the flat-blade screwdriver feels a response (that is, due to the inclination). So-called click feeling) occurs. In addition, a sound (for example, a clicking sound) caused by the inclination of the operation unit 5 is also generated. Therefore, the worker can easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state.
 さらに、接続機器1では、操作部5の上述の傾斜と略同時に、操作部5の上端部51の左側の下端が、ケース2の移動経路24内に設けられた上下方向に略垂直な停止面242に上側から接触する。これにより、操作部5の下方への過剰な移動を制限することができる。また、操作部5の上端部51と停止面242との接触による手応えおよび/または音の発生により、作業員は、挿入穴閉鎖状態から挿入穴開放状態への移行完了をさらに容易に認識することもできる。 Further, in the connected device 1, at substantially the same time as the above-mentioned inclination of the operation unit 5, the lower left end of the upper end 51 of the operation unit 5 is a stop surface provided in the movement path 24 of the case 2 and substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction. Contact 242 from above. Thereby, it is possible to limit the excessive movement of the operation unit 5 downward. Further, the operator can more easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state by the response and / or the generation of sound due to the contact between the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 and the stop surface 242. You can also.
 図5に示す挿入穴開放状態では、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部(すなわち、当該領域よりも下側)に位置する。あるいは、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域と略同一平面上に位置していてもよい。操作部5の他の表面についても同様である。換言すれば、図5に示す挿入穴開放状態では、操作部5の表面は、ケース2の表面のうち操作部5の周囲の領域(すなわち、移動経路24の周囲の領域)よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。 In the state where the insertion hole is open as shown in FIG. 5, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 than the area around the operation unit 5. Located on the side). Alternatively, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 may be located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5. In other words, in the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. 5, the surface of the operation unit 5 is the surface of the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
 図5に示す挿入穴開放状態では、弾性部材4は、後述する結線状態の弾性部材4よりも撓んでおり、電線を端子部3との間で挟持しない。換言すれば、図5に示す接続機器1の状態である挿入穴開放状態は、弾性部材4と端子部3との間の電線の挟持が解除された「非結線状態」である。 In the state where the insertion hole is opened shown in FIG. 5, the elastic member 4 is more bent than the elastic member 4 in the wire-connected state described later, and does not sandwich the electric wire with the terminal portion 3. In other words, the insertion hole open state, which is the state of the connecting device 1 shown in FIG. 5, is a “non-connection state” in which the pinching of the electric wire between the elastic member 4 and the terminal portion 3 is released.
 続いて、弾性部材4が挿入穴開放状態にて維持された状態で、電線91が、図5中に二点鎖線にて示すように接続機器1の挿入穴21に挿入される。電線91は、例えば単線であってもよく、より線であってもよい。また、電線91は、先端部に棒状圧着端子等が設けられたより線であってもよい。電線91の先端部の直径は、例えば、0.42mm以上であることが好ましい。電線91の先端部の直径は、現実的には、2.3mm以下である。電線91の先端部の直径は、様々に変更されてよい。また、電線91の先端部以外の部位の直径も、様々に変更されてよい。 Subsequently, the electric wire 91 is inserted into the insertion hole 21 of the connecting device 1 as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 5 while the elastic member 4 is maintained in the insertion hole open state. The electric wire 91 may be, for example, a single wire or a stranded wire. Further, the electric wire 91 may be a stranded wire provided with a rod-shaped crimp terminal or the like at the tip end portion. The diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is preferably 0.42 mm or more, for example. The diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is practically 2.3 mm or less. The diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways. Further, the diameter of the portion other than the tip end portion of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways.
 電線91は、挿入穴21内にて下方へと移動され、図7に示すように、端子部3と挿入穴開放状態の弾性部材4との間に挿入される。その後、操作部5を押し込む作業員の力が弱められ、弾性部材4の復元力が、作業員の力と第2傾斜面241による支持力との合計よりも大きくなることにより、弾性部材4の可動部43が右斜め上方へと移動し、図8に示すように、電線91に左側から接触する。弾性部材4の可動部43は、上記復元力により、電線91を端子部3に押し付けて端子部3との間で挟持する。これにより、電線91と端子部3とが電気的かつ機械的に接続される。換言すれば、電線91が接続機器1に結線される。以下の説明では、図8に示す状態を「結線状態」という。結線状態の弾性部材4は、上述のように、電線91を端子部3との間で挟持している。 The electric wire 91 is moved downward in the insertion hole 21 and is inserted between the terminal portion 3 and the elastic member 4 in the insertion hole open state as shown in FIG. 7. After that, the force of the worker pushing the operation unit 5 is weakened, and the restoring force of the elastic member 4 becomes larger than the sum of the force of the worker and the bearing force of the second inclined surface 241. The movable portion 43 moves diagonally upward to the right and comes into contact with the electric wire 91 from the left side as shown in FIG. The movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3. As a result, the electric wire 91 and the terminal portion 3 are electrically and mechanically connected. In other words, the electric wire 91 is connected to the connecting device 1. In the following description, the state shown in FIG. 8 is referred to as a “connection state”. As described above, the elastic member 4 in the connected state sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3.
 接続機器1では、また、弾性部材4の可動部43の上記右斜め上方への移動により、操作部5の上方への移動が開始される。このとき、第1傾斜面56は、第2傾斜面241に接触した状態を維持しつつ、第2傾斜面241に沿って右斜め上方へと移動する。操作部5は、図7に示す挿入穴開放状態から上方に移動し、下端部53が弾性部材4の可動部43に接触した状態で停止する。結線状態における操作部5の第1傾斜面56は、第2傾斜面241よりも上側に位置する。 In the connecting device 1, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is moved diagonally upward to the right to start moving the operating portion 5 upward. At this time, the first inclined surface 56 moves diagonally upward to the right along the second inclined surface 241 while maintaining the state of being in contact with the second inclined surface 241. The operation unit 5 moves upward from the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. 7, and stops in a state where the lower end portion 53 is in contact with the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4. The first inclined surface 56 of the operation unit 5 in the connected state is located above the second inclined surface 241.
 図8に示す結線状態では、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部(すなわち、当該領域よりも下側)に位置する。あるいは、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域と略同一平面上に位置していてもよい。操作部5の他の表面についても同様である。換言すれば、図8に示す結線状態では、操作部5の表面は、ケース2の表面のうち操作部5の周囲の領域(すなわち、移動経路24の周囲の領域)よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。 In the wiring state shown in FIG. 8, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 with respect to the area around the operation unit 5. Located in. Alternatively, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 may be located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5. In other words, in the wiring state shown in FIG. 8, the surface of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24) in the surface of the case 2. It is located or is located substantially in the same plane as the area.
 なお、図8に示す結線状態において、図8中の上側が重力方向下側となるように接続機器1が配置されている場合、操作部5は、重力により弾性部材4から図中の上方に離間する。そして、操作部5の操作段差部55が、図2に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態と同様に、ケース2の一部に係止され、操作部5の上方への移動が制限される。したがって、操作部5が図2に示す位置よりも上側へと移動することが防止される。 In the connection state shown in FIG. 8, when the connecting device 1 is arranged so that the upper side in FIG. 8 is the lower side in the direction of gravity, the operation unit 5 is moved upward in the drawing from the elastic member 4 due to gravity. Separate. Then, the operation step portion 55 of the operation portion 5 is locked to a part of the case 2 as in the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 2, and the upward movement of the operation portion 5 is restricted. Therefore, it is prevented that the operation unit 5 moves upward from the position shown in FIG.
 電線91を接続機器1から取り外す際には、例えば、作業員が通常のマイナスドライバー等の先端を、操作部5の上端部51の操作凹部に接触させ、当該マイナスドライバーを介して操作部5に下向きの力を加える。そして、操作部5を下方に移動し、図7に示すように挿入穴開放状態とする。挿入穴開放状態では、上述のように、弾性部材4は撓んで可動部43が電線91から左側へと離間する。換言すれば、弾性部材4および端子部3による電線91の挟持が解除される。また、操作部5が傾斜することにより、操作部5の第1傾斜面56がケース2の第2傾斜面241に下側から当接し、弾性部材4の復元力の一部が第2傾斜面241により支持される。 When removing the electric wire 91 from the connecting device 1, for example, a worker brings the tip of a normal flat-blade screwdriver or the like into contact with the operation recess of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5, and brings the wire 91 to the operation unit 5 via the flat-blade screwdriver. Apply a downward force. Then, the operation unit 5 is moved downward to open the insertion hole as shown in FIG. In the state where the insertion hole is open, as described above, the elastic member 4 bends and the movable portion 43 is separated from the electric wire 91 to the left side. In other words, the sandwiching of the electric wire 91 by the elastic member 4 and the terminal portion 3 is released. Further, when the operating portion 5 is inclined, the first inclined surface 56 of the operating unit 5 comes into contact with the second inclined surface 241 of the case 2 from below, and a part of the restoring force of the elastic member 4 is a second inclined surface. Supported by 241.
 このときも、上記と同様に、操作部5の傾斜に起因する手応えおよび音が発生するため、作業員は、接続機器1が挿入穴開放状態(すなわち、非結線状態)となったことを容易に認識することができる。また、操作部5の上端部51と停止面242との接触による手応えおよび/または音の発生により、接続機器1が挿入穴開放状態(すなわち、非結線状態)となったことをさらに容易に認識することができる。 At this time as well, since the response and sound caused by the inclination of the operation unit 5 are generated as described above, the worker can easily put the connected device 1 in the insertion hole open state (that is, the unconnected state). Can be recognized. Further, it is more easily recognized that the connected device 1 is in the insertion hole open state (that is, the unconnected state) due to the response and / or the generation of sound due to the contact between the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 and the stop surface 242. can do.
 接続機器1では、弾性部材4は、図2に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態と、図5および図7に示す挿入穴開放状態と、図8に示す結線状態との間で変形可能である。以下の説明では、図8に示すように、結線状態の弾性部材4に接触する操作部5の位置を「第1位置」と呼ぶ。また、図5および図7に示すように、挿入穴開放状態(すなわち、非結線状態)の弾性部材4に接触する操作部5の位置を「第2位置」と呼ぶ。さらに、図2に示すように、操作段差部55がケース2の一部に係止する操作部5の位置を「第3位置」と呼ぶ。 In the connecting device 1, the elastic member 4 can be deformed between the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 2, the insertion hole open state shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, and the connection state shown in FIG. In the following description, as shown in FIG. 8, the position of the operating portion 5 in contact with the elastic member 4 in the connected state is referred to as a “first position”. Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the position of the operation unit 5 in contact with the elastic member 4 in the insertion hole open state (that is, the non-connection state) is referred to as a “second position”. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the position of the operation portion 5 in which the operation step portion 55 is locked to a part of the case 2 is referred to as a “third position”.
 上述の移動経路24は、操作部5の第3位置、第1位置および第2位置をこの順に結ぶ。第3位置は、移動経路24において、第1位置を挟んで第2位置とは反対側に位置する。第2位置では、上述のように、操作部5の第1傾斜面56はケース2の第2傾斜面241に下側から当接する。第3位置では、操作段差部55がケース2の一部に係止することにより、操作部5の上方への移動(すなわち、第2位置から離れる方向への移動)が制限される。なお、第3位置では、操作部5の一部がケース2の一部に係止していればよく、必ずしも操作段差部55がケース2の一部に係止する必要はない。 The above-mentioned movement path 24 connects the third position, the first position, and the second position of the operation unit 5 in this order. The third position is located on the movement path 24 on the opposite side of the first position from the second position. At the second position, as described above, the first inclined surface 56 of the operating portion 5 abuts on the second inclined surface 241 of the case 2 from below. At the third position, the operation step portion 55 is locked to a part of the case 2, so that the upward movement of the operation portion 5 (that is, the movement in the direction away from the second position) is restricted. At the third position, it is sufficient that a part of the operation unit 5 is locked to a part of the case 2, and the operation step portion 55 does not necessarily have to be locked to a part of the case 2.
 以上に説明したように、電線91が接続される接続機器1は、ケース2と、端子部3と、弾性部材4と、操作部5とを備える。端子部3は、導電性であり、ケース2に固定される。弾性部材4は、ケース2に取り付けられる。弾性部材4は、復元力により電線91を端子部3に押し付けて挟持する。操作部5は、ケース2に設けられた上下方向に延びる移動経路24に沿って移動することにより、弾性部材4の形状を変更する。弾性部材4は、電線91を端子部3との間で挟持している結線状態と、結線状態よりも撓んで端子部3との間の電線91の挟持が解除された非結線状態(すなわち、挿入穴開放状態)との間で変形可能である。 As described above, the connecting device 1 to which the electric wire 91 is connected includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5. The terminal portion 3 is conductive and is fixed to the case 2. The elastic member 4 is attached to the case 2. The elastic member 4 presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91. The operation unit 5 changes the shape of the elastic member 4 by moving along a movement path 24 extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2. The elastic member 4 is in a connected state in which the electric wire 91 is sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 and a non-connected state in which the electric wire 91 is released from being sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 by being bent more than the connected state (that is,). It can be deformed with the insertion hole open state).
 操作部5は、第1位置において結線状態の弾性部材4に接触する。操作部5は、弾性部材4との接触状態を維持しつつ、第1位置よりも下側の第2位置へと押し込まれることにより、弾性部材4を非結線状態へと変形させる。接続機器1は、操作部5が第2位置に位置する状態において、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力を低減させる保持力低減機構60をさらに備える。これにより、接続機器1を非結線状態で維持する力を低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1の操作性を向上することができる。 The operation unit 5 comes into contact with the elastic member 4 in the connected state at the first position. The operating unit 5 deforms the elastic member 4 into a non-wired state by being pushed into the second position below the first position while maintaining the contact state with the elastic member 4. The connecting device 1 further includes a holding force reducing mechanism 60 that reduces the force for maintaining the operating unit 5 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 when the operating unit 5 is located at the second position. As a result, the force for maintaining the connected device 1 in the unconnected state can be reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1 can be improved.
 上述のように、好ましくは、操作部5は、下方に向かうに従って移動経路24の中心線から離れる方向に傾斜する第1傾斜面56を有する。ケース2は、移動経路24内において第1傾斜面56と平行に上下方向に対して傾斜する第2傾斜面241を有する。保持力低減機構60は、第1傾斜面56および第2傾斜面241を備える。操作部5が第1位置に位置する状態では、第1傾斜面56は第2傾斜面241から上側に離間した位置に位置する。操作部5が第2位置に位置する状態では、第1傾斜面56は第2傾斜面241に下側から当接する。 As described above, preferably, the operation unit 5 has a first inclined surface 56 that inclines in a direction away from the center line of the movement path 24 as it goes downward. The case 2 has a second inclined surface 241 that is inclined in the vertical direction in parallel with the first inclined surface 56 in the movement path 24. The holding force reducing mechanism 60 includes a first inclined surface 56 and a second inclined surface 241. In the state where the operation unit 5 is located at the first position, the first inclined surface 56 is located at a position separated upward from the second inclined surface 241. When the operation unit 5 is located at the second position, the first inclined surface 56 comes into contact with the second inclined surface 241 from below.
 このように、弾性部材4の復元力により上向きに押される操作部5が、第1傾斜面56を介してケース2の第2傾斜面241に当接することにより、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力を、簡素な構造によって低減することができる。これにより、接続機器1の操作性を容易に向上することができる。 In this way, the operating portion 5 pushed upward by the restoring force of the elastic member 4 comes into contact with the second inclined surface 241 of the case 2 via the first inclined surface 56, so that the operating portion 5 is brought into the case 2. The force to maintain in the pushed state (ie, unconnected state) can be reduced by a simple structure. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1 can be easily improved.
 上述のように、好ましくは、非結線状態の弾性部材4の復元力により、第1傾斜面56は第2傾斜面241に対して上向きに押圧され、第2傾斜面241は弾性部材4の復元力を部分的に支持する。このため、非結線状態の接続機器1に電線91を結線する際に、マイナスドライバー等により操作部5を下向きに押す力を緩めることにより、操作部5を第2位置から第1位置へと容易に移動させ、弾性部材4の可動部43と端子部3との間に電線91を容易に挟持させることができる。また、接続機器1から電線91を抜き取った後、弾性部材4を非結線状態(すなわち、挿入穴開放状態)から挿入穴閉鎖状態へと戻す際にも同様に、マイナスドライバー等により操作部5を下向きに押す力を緩めることにより、操作部5を第2位置から第3位置へと容易に移動させることができる。したがって、電線91の結線の際、あるいは、電線91の結線解除の際に、マイナスドライバー等を移動経路24に繰り返し挿入する必要がないため、接続機器1の操作性を向上することができる。 As described above, preferably, the restoring force of the elastic member 4 in the non-connected state presses the first inclined surface 56 upward with respect to the second inclined surface 241 and the second inclined surface 241 restores the elastic member 4. Partially support the force. Therefore, when the electric wire 91 is connected to the connected device 1 in the unconnected state, the operation unit 5 can be easily moved from the second position to the first position by relaxing the force for pushing the operation unit 5 downward with a flat-blade screwdriver or the like. The electric wire 91 can be easily sandwiched between the movable portion 43 and the terminal portion 3 of the elastic member 4. Similarly, when the elastic member 4 is returned from the unconnected state (that is, the insertion hole open state) to the insertion hole closed state after the electric wire 91 is pulled out from the connecting device 1, the operation unit 5 is similarly moved by a flat-blade screwdriver or the like. By loosening the downward pushing force, the operation unit 5 can be easily moved from the second position to the third position. Therefore, when connecting the electric wire 91 or disconnecting the electric wire 91, it is not necessary to repeatedly insert a flat-blade screwdriver or the like into the moving path 24, so that the operability of the connected device 1 can be improved.
 上述のように、第1傾斜面56は、操作部5の上端に設けられることが好ましい。これにより、第1傾斜面56を視認可能とすることができるため、操作部5が第3位置から第2位置に到達するタイミング(すなわち、操作部5を押し込む力が低減されるタイミング)等を、比較的容易に直感的に把握することができる。したがって、接続機器1の操作性をさらに向上することができる。また、第1傾斜面56を周囲の部位とは異なる色に着色している場合、操作部5が第2位置に位置することにより第1傾斜面56の色が見えなくなるため、操作部5が第2位置に到達したことを視覚を通じてさらに容易に把握することができる。 As described above, the first inclined surface 56 is preferably provided at the upper end of the operation unit 5. As a result, the first inclined surface 56 can be made visible, so that the timing at which the operation unit 5 reaches the second position from the third position (that is, the timing at which the force for pushing the operation unit 5 is reduced) and the like can be set. , It can be grasped relatively easily and intuitively. Therefore, the operability of the connected device 1 can be further improved. Further, when the first inclined surface 56 is colored in a color different from that of the surrounding portion, the color of the first inclined surface 56 cannot be seen because the operation unit 5 is located at the second position, so that the operation unit 5 becomes invisible. It is easier to visually grasp that the second position has been reached.
 上述のように、弾性部材4は板バネであることが好ましい。これにより、接続機器1の構造を簡素化することができる。その結果、接続機器1の製造を容易とすることができる。 As described above, the elastic member 4 is preferably a leaf spring. As a result, the structure of the connected device 1 can be simplified. As a result, the manufacturing of the connected device 1 can be facilitated.
 接続機器1では、図9に示すように、操作部5の第1傾斜面56に凸部561が設けられ、ケース2の第2傾斜面241に凹部243が設けられてもよい。凹部243は、操作部5が上述の第2位置に位置する状態で、凸部561と嵌合する。これにより、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。 In the connected device 1, as shown in FIG. 9, a convex portion 561 may be provided on the first inclined surface 56 of the operation unit 5, and a concave portion 243 may be provided on the second inclined surface 241 of the case 2. The concave portion 243 fits with the convex portion 561 in a state where the operating portion 5 is located at the above-mentioned second position. As a result, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5 in the case 2 in the pushed state can be further reduced.
 また、接続機器1では、ケース2の第2傾斜面241に凸部が設けられ、操作部5の第1傾斜面56に凹部が設けられてもよい。換言すれば、接続機器1では、第1傾斜面56および第2傾斜面241のうち一方の面が凸部を有し、第1傾斜面56および第2傾斜面241のうち他方の面が、操作部5が第2位置に位置する状態で当該凸部と嵌合する凹部を有することが好ましい。これにより、上述のように、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1の操作性をさらに向上することができる。なお、この場合であっても、操作部5を押し込む力を緩めると、弾性部材4の復元力により、操作部5は上方へと移動し、可動部43は右上方へと移動する。 Further, in the connecting device 1, a convex portion may be provided on the second inclined surface 241 of the case 2, and a concave portion may be provided on the first inclined surface 56 of the operation unit 5. In other words, in the connecting device 1, one of the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 has a convex portion, and the other surface of the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 has a convex portion. It is preferable to have a concave portion that fits with the convex portion in a state where the operating portion 5 is located at the second position. As a result, as described above, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state) can be further reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1 can be further improved. Even in this case, when the force for pushing the operating portion 5 is relaxed, the operating portion 5 moves upward and the movable portion 43 moves upward to the right due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4.
 接続機器1では、図10に太線にて示すように、第1傾斜面56および第2傾斜面241が、周囲の部位よりも表面粗度が大きい粗面部562,244を有していてもよい。粗面部562と粗面部244とが接触することにより、第1傾斜面56と第2傾斜面241との間の摩擦抵抗が増大するため、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。 In the connected device 1, as shown by a thick line in FIG. 10, the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 may have a rough surface portion 562, 244 having a surface roughness larger than that of the surrounding portion. .. Since the frictional resistance between the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 increases due to the contact between the rough surface portion 562 and the rough surface portion 244, the operating portion 5 is maintained in a pushed state into the case 2. The force can be further reduced.
 接続機器1では、第1傾斜面56および第2傾斜面241のうち、少なくとも一方の面に粗面部が設けられていればよい。この場合であっても、第1傾斜面56と第2傾斜面241との間の摩擦抵抗が増大するため、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1の操作性をさらに向上することができる。なお、当該摩擦抵抗が増大した状態であっても、操作部5を押し込む力を緩めると、弾性部材4の復元力により、操作部5は上方へと移動し、可動部43は右上方へと移動する。 In the connecting device 1, it is sufficient that the rough surface portion is provided on at least one of the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241. Even in this case, since the frictional resistance between the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 increases, the operation unit 5 is maintained in a state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, in a non-connected state). The force can be further reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1 can be further improved. Even when the frictional resistance is increased, if the force for pushing the operating portion 5 is relaxed, the operating portion 5 moves upward due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4, and the movable portion 43 moves upward to the right. Moving.
 次に、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る接続機器1aについて説明する。図11および図12は、接続機器1aの操作部5a近傍を拡大して示す断面図である。接続機器1aは、図6に示す第1傾斜面56および第2傾斜面241とは異なる位置に第1傾斜面56aおよび第2傾斜面241aが設けられる点を除き、接続機器1と略同様の構造を有する。以下の説明では、接続機器1の構成に対応する接続機器1aの構成に同符号を付す。 Next, the connecting device 1a according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described. 11 and 12 are sectional views showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation unit 5a of the connected device 1a. The connected device 1a is substantially the same as the connected device 1 except that the first inclined surface 56a and the second inclined surface 241a are provided at positions different from the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 shown in FIG. Has a structure. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations of the connected equipment 1a corresponding to the configurations of the connected equipment 1.
 図11は、接続機器1aの右側の操作部5aが第1位置に位置する状態(すなわち、結線状態)を示し、図12は、当該操作部5aが第2位置に位置する状態(すなわち、非結線状態)を示す。操作部5aは、操作段差部55の右側の端部(すなわち、連結部52から遠い側の端部)に、第1傾斜面56aを有する。第1傾斜面56aは、操作部5aの上端部51よりも下側に設けられる。第1傾斜面56aは、操作段差部55から右斜め下方へと向かう。換言すれば、第1傾斜面56aは、下方に向かうに従って移動経路24の中心線から離れる方向に傾斜する面である。ケース2は、移動経路24内において第1傾斜面56aと平行に上下方向に対して傾斜する第2傾斜面241aを有する。 FIG. 11 shows a state in which the operation unit 5a on the right side of the connected device 1a is located in the first position (that is, a wiring state), and FIG. 12 shows a state in which the operation unit 5a is located in the second position (that is, non-connection state). (Connection state) is shown. The operation portion 5a has a first inclined surface 56a at the right end portion (that is, the end portion on the side far from the connecting portion 52) of the operation step portion 55. The first inclined surface 56a is provided below the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5a. The first inclined surface 56a faces diagonally downward to the right from the operation step portion 55. In other words, the first inclined surface 56a is a surface that inclines in a direction away from the center line of the movement path 24 as it goes downward. The case 2 has a second inclined surface 241a that is inclined in the vertical direction in parallel with the first inclined surface 56a in the movement path 24.
 図11に示すように、操作部5aが第1位置に位置する状態では、第1傾斜面56aは第2傾斜面241aから上側に離間した位置に位置する。また、図12に示すように、操作部5aが第2位置に位置する状態では、第1傾斜面56aは第2傾斜面241aに下側から当接する。これにより、図6に示す接続機器1と同様に、操作部5aをケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、図12に示す非結線状態)で維持する力を低減することができる。すなわち、接続機器1aでは、第1傾斜面56aおよび第2傾斜面241aにより、操作部5aをケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力を低減させる保持力低減機構60aが構成される。これにより、接続機器1aの操作性を向上することができる。 As shown in FIG. 11, when the operation unit 5a is located at the first position, the first inclined surface 56a is located at a position separated upward from the second inclined surface 241a. Further, as shown in FIG. 12, when the operating portion 5a is located at the second position, the first inclined surface 56a comes into contact with the second inclined surface 241a from below. As a result, similarly to the connected device 1 shown in FIG. 6, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5a in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state shown in FIG. 12) can be reduced. That is, in the connected device 1a, the first inclined surface 56a and the second inclined surface 241a constitute a holding force reducing mechanism 60a that reduces the force for maintaining the operating portion 5a in the case 2 in a pushed state. Thereby, the operability of the connected device 1a can be improved.
 接続機器1aでは、接続機器1と同様に、非結線状態の弾性部材4の復元力により、第1傾斜面56aは第2傾斜面241aに対して上向きに押圧され、第2傾斜面241aは弾性部材4の復元力を部分的に支持することが好ましい。これにより、接続機器1と同様に、接続機器1aの操作性を向上することができる。 In the connecting device 1a, similarly to the connecting device 1, the first inclined surface 56a is pressed upward against the second inclined surface 241a by the restoring force of the elastic member 4 in the non-connected state, and the second inclined surface 241a is elastic. It is preferable to partially support the restoring force of the member 4. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1a can be improved as in the connected device 1.
 上述のように、第1傾斜面56aは、操作部5aの上端部51よりも下側に設けられることが好ましい。これにより、第1傾斜面56aがケース2の内部に位置するため、操作部5aの押し込みに使用されるマイナスドライバー等と衝突して破損することを防止することができる。 As described above, it is preferable that the first inclined surface 56a is provided below the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5a. As a result, since the first inclined surface 56a is located inside the case 2, it is possible to prevent it from colliding with a flat-blade screwdriver or the like used for pushing the operating portion 5a and being damaged.
 接続機器1aでは、接続機器1と同様に、弾性部材4は板バネであることが好ましい。これにより、接続機器1aの構造を簡素化することができる。その結果、接続機器1aの製造を容易とすることができる。 In the connecting device 1a, it is preferable that the elastic member 4 is a leaf spring as in the connecting device 1. As a result, the structure of the connected device 1a can be simplified. As a result, the connection device 1a can be easily manufactured.
 接続機器1aでは、接続機器1と同様に、第1傾斜面56aおよび第2傾斜面241aのうち一方の面が凸部を有し、第1傾斜面56aおよび第2傾斜面241aのうち他方の面が、操作部5aが第2位置に位置する状態で当該凸部と嵌合する凹部を有することが好ましい。これにより、接続機器1と同様に、操作部5aをケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1aの操作性をさらに向上することができる。 In the connecting device 1a, as in the connecting device 1, one of the first inclined surface 56a and the second inclined surface 241a has a convex portion, and the other of the first inclined surface 56a and the second inclined surface 241a has a convex portion. It is preferable that the surface has a concave portion that fits with the convex portion in a state where the operating portion 5a is located at the second position. As a result, similarly to the connected device 1, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5a in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state) can be further reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1a can be further improved.
 接続機器1aでは、接続機器1と同様に、第1傾斜面56aおよび第2傾斜面241aのうち、少なくとも一方の面に粗面部が設けられてもよい。これにより、接続機器1と同様に、操作部5aをケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1aの操作性をさらに向上することができる。 In the connecting device 1a, as in the connecting device 1, a rough surface portion may be provided on at least one of the first inclined surface 56a and the second inclined surface 241a. As a result, similarly to the connected device 1, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5a in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state) can be further reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1a can be further improved.
 図13は、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る接続機器1bの斜視図である。図14は、接続機器1bの断面図である。図15は、接続機器1bを図14中のXV-XVの位置にて切断した断面図である。接続機器1bは、電線91が接続されるプッシュイン式の接続機器である。接続機器1bは、例えば、制御盤等の端子台に利用される。図13では、接続機器1bの手前側に薄板状のエンドプレート11が取り付けられている。また、図13では、複数の接続機器1bが連結された状態を二点鎖線にて示す。図14および図15では、電線91が接続機器1bに挿入されていない状態を示す。図14では、断面よりも奥側の構成についても併せて図示している。以下の説明では、接続機器1bの構成のうち、図1ないし図4に示す接続機器1の構成に対応するものに同符号を付す。 FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the connecting device 1b according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the connected device 1b. FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of the connected device 1b cut at the position of XV-XV in FIG. The connecting device 1b is a push-in type connecting device to which the electric wire 91 is connected. The connected device 1b is used, for example, as a terminal block such as a control panel. In FIG. 13, a thin plate-shaped end plate 11 is attached to the front side of the connecting device 1b. Further, in FIG. 13, a state in which a plurality of connected devices 1b are connected is shown by a two-dot chain line. 14 and 15 show a state in which the electric wire 91 is not inserted into the connecting device 1b. In FIG. 14, the configuration on the back side of the cross section is also shown. In the following description, among the configurations of the connected device 1b, those corresponding to the configuration of the connected device 1 shown in FIGS. 1 to 4 are designated by the same reference numerals.
 以下の説明では、図14中の上下方向および左右方向を、単に「上下方向」および「左右方向」とも呼ぶ。また、図14において紙面に垂直な方向を「厚さ方向」とも呼ぶ。図14は、接続機器1bの厚さ方向の略中央における断面を示す。当該上下方向、左右方向および厚さ方向は、接続機器1bが使用される際の取付方向とは必ずしも一致する必要はない。また、当該上下方向は、重力方向とも必ずしも一致する必要はない。 In the following description, the vertical direction and the horizontal direction in FIG. 14 are also simply referred to as "vertical direction" and "horizontal direction". Further, in FIG. 14, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface is also referred to as a "thickness direction". FIG. 14 shows a cross section of the connected device 1b at substantially the center in the thickness direction. The vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the thickness direction do not necessarily have to coincide with the mounting direction when the connected device 1b is used. Further, the vertical direction does not necessarily have to coincide with the direction of gravity.
 接続機器1bは、ケース2と、端子部3と、弾性部材4bと、操作部5bとを備える。ケース2は、端子部3、弾性部材4bおよび操作部5bを内部に収容する。ケース2は、例えば樹脂製である。図14に示す例では、ケース2には、それぞれに電線が挿入可能な2つの挿入穴21が設けられる。また、ケース2の内部には、2つの端子部3と、2つの弾性部材4bと、2つの操作部5bとが収容されている。換言すれば、接続機器1bは、2セットの端子部3、弾性部材4bおよび操作部5bを備える。なお、接続機器1bは、1セットまたは3セット以上の端子部3、弾性部材4bおよび操作部5bを備えていてもよい。 The connecting device 1b includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4b, and an operating portion 5b. The case 2 houses the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4b, and the operation portion 5b inside. The case 2 is made of resin, for example. In the example shown in FIG. 14, the case 2 is provided with two insertion holes 21 into which electric wires can be inserted. Further, inside the case 2, two terminal portions 3, two elastic members 4b, and two operating portions 5b are housed. In other words, the connecting device 1b includes two sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4b, and an operating portion 5b. The connecting device 1b may include one set or three or more sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4b, and an operation portion 5b.
 端子部3、弾性部材4bおよび操作部5bの各セットは、挿入穴21に対応して配置される。2セットの端子部3、弾性部材4bおよび操作部5bは、形状および大きさ等は互いに同じであり、左右反対向きに配置される。図14中の右側の挿入穴21に注目すると、端子部3は、挿入穴21の下端部の右側に位置し、挿入穴21の下端部から下方に延びる。弾性部材4bは、挿入穴21の下端部から左斜め上方へと延び、さらに左斜め下方へと延びる。操作部5bは、挿入穴21の左側において、弾性部材4bの上側に配置される。 Each set of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4b, and the operation portion 5b is arranged corresponding to the insertion hole 21. The two sets of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4b, and the operating portion 5b have the same shape and size, and are arranged in opposite directions. Focusing on the insertion hole 21 on the right side in FIG. 14, the terminal portion 3 is located on the right side of the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21 and extends downward from the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21. The elastic member 4b extends diagonally upward to the left from the lower end of the insertion hole 21, and further extends diagonally downward to the left. The operation unit 5b is arranged on the left side of the insertion hole 21 and above the elastic member 4b.
 端子部3は、ケース2に固定された導電性の部材である。端子部3は、例えば金属製である。図14中の右側の端子部3は、図14中の左側の端子部3と電気的に接続されている。図14および図15に示す例では、当該2つの端子部3は一繋がりの部材である。具体的には、2つの端子部3の下端部が、左右方向に延びる導電性の端子接続部32により接続されている。 The terminal portion 3 is a conductive member fixed to the case 2. The terminal portion 3 is made of metal, for example. The right terminal portion 3 in FIG. 14 is electrically connected to the left terminal portion 3 in FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the two terminal portions 3 are connected members. Specifically, the lower ends of the two terminal portions 3 are connected by a conductive terminal connecting portion 32 extending in the left-right direction.
 弾性部材4bは、ケース2に取り付けられた弾性変形可能な部材である。図14および図15に示すように、弾性部材4bは、略帯状の板バネである。弾性部材4bは、例えば金属製である。弾性部材4bは、導電材料により形成されてもよく、樹脂等の絶縁材料により形成されてもよい。弾性部材4bは、例えば、長手方向の中央部41にて略V字状または略U字状に折り曲げられた形状を有する。すなわち、中央部41は、弾性部材4bの長手方向の略中央に位置する折り曲げ部である。弾性部材4bは、中央部41が上端に位置する状態でケース2に固定される。弾性部材4bは、中央部41がケース2に固定されることにより、両端部を略下側に向けた状態でケース2に取り付けられる。以下の説明では、ケース2のうち中央部41に下側から接する部位22を、「支持部22」と呼ぶ。支持部22は、厚さ方向を向く中心軸を中心とする略円柱状である。 The elastic member 4b is an elastically deformable member attached to the case 2. As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the elastic member 4b is a substantially strip-shaped leaf spring. The elastic member 4b is made of metal, for example. The elastic member 4b may be formed of a conductive material or an insulating material such as a resin. The elastic member 4b has, for example, a shape that is bent into a substantially V shape or a substantially U shape at the central portion 41 in the longitudinal direction. That is, the central portion 41 is a bent portion located substantially in the center of the elastic member 4b in the longitudinal direction. The elastic member 4b is fixed to the case 2 with the central portion 41 located at the upper end. The elastic member 4b is attached to the case 2 with both ends facing substantially downward by fixing the central portion 41 to the case 2. In the following description, the portion 22 of the case 2 that contacts the central portion 41 from below is referred to as a “support portion 22”. The support portion 22 has a substantially columnar shape centered on a central axis facing the thickness direction.
 弾性部材4bは、中央部41の左右両側において、中央部41から斜め下方に延びる一対の腕部42bを備える。一対の腕部42bの左右方向における間隔は、下方に向かうに従って大きくなる。一対の腕部42bは、中央部41を通る中心線に対して略線対称である。図14に示す状態において、一対の腕部42bの成す角度は、0°よりも大きく、かつ、180°よりも小さい。図14に示す例では、当該角度は90°よりも大きい。 The elastic member 4b includes a pair of arm portions 42b extending diagonally downward from the central portion 41 on both the left and right sides of the central portion 41. The distance between the pair of arms 42b in the left-right direction increases downward. The pair of arm portions 42b are substantially axisymmetric with respect to the center line passing through the central portion 41. In the state shown in FIG. 14, the angle formed by the pair of arm portions 42b is larger than 0 ° and smaller than 180 °. In the example shown in FIG. 14, the angle is greater than 90 °.
 図14中の右側の弾性部材4bに注目すると、弾性部材4bのうち、中央部41から支持部22の右側に延びる腕部42bは、上下方向に延びる端子部3に接触している。一対の腕部42bは、操作部5bにより下方に押されることにより、支持部22の上端部を支点として弾性変形し、左右方向において互いに近づく方向に撓む。また、一対の腕部42bに対する下向きの押圧力がなくなると、一対の腕部42bは復元力により元の状態に戻る(すなわち、弾性復帰する)。 Focusing on the elastic member 4b on the right side in FIG. 14, the arm portion 42b extending from the central portion 41 to the right side of the support portion 22 of the elastic member 4b is in contact with the terminal portion 3 extending in the vertical direction. When the pair of arm portions 42b is pushed downward by the operating portion 5b, the pair of arm portions 42b are elastically deformed with the upper end portion of the support portion 22 as a fulcrum, and are bent in a direction approaching each other in the left-right direction. Further, when the downward pressing force on the pair of arms 42b disappears, the pair of arms 42b returns to the original state (that is, elastically returns) due to the restoring force.
 図14に示す状態では、弾性部材4bの一方の腕部42bの先端が、上述のように、挿入穴21よりも下側において端子部3に接触し、挿入穴21の下端部を下側から閉鎖している。以下の説明では、図14に示す状態を「挿入穴閉鎖状態」と呼ぶ。また、挿入穴閉鎖状態は、挿入穴21に電線が挿入される前の状態、すなわち、接続機器1bが使用される前の初期状態である。挿入穴閉鎖状態(すなわち、初期状態)の弾性部材4bは、一対の腕部42bが近づく向きに少し撓んでいる。これにより、弾性部材4bがケース2から脱落することを防止することができる。 In the state shown in FIG. 14, the tip of one arm 42b of the elastic member 4b contacts the terminal 3 below the insertion hole 21 as described above, and the lower end of the insertion hole 21 is pressed from below. It is closed. In the following description, the state shown in FIG. 14 is referred to as an “insertion hole closed state”. The insertion hole closed state is a state before the electric wire is inserted into the insertion hole 21, that is, an initial state before the connecting device 1b is used. The elastic member 4b in the insertion hole closed state (that is, the initial state) is slightly bent in the direction in which the pair of arm portions 42b approach each other. This makes it possible to prevent the elastic member 4b from falling off from the case 2.
 操作部5bは、上下方向に延びる略柱状の部材である。操作部5bは、ケース2に設けられた上下方向に延びる穴部(以下、「移動経路24」と呼ぶ。)の内部に位置する。操作部5bは、移動経路24に沿って上下方向に移動可能である。移動経路24は、ケース2の上面25に開口し、当該上面25から略下方に延びる。 The operation unit 5b is a substantially columnar member extending in the vertical direction. The operation unit 5b is located inside a hole portion (hereinafter, referred to as “movement path 24”) extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2. The operation unit 5b can move in the vertical direction along the movement path 24. The movement path 24 opens to the upper surface 25 of the case 2 and extends substantially downward from the upper surface 25.
 操作部5bは、上端部51と、連結部52と、一対の押圧部53bとを備える。上端部51、連結部52および一対の押圧部53bは、この順序で上側から下側に向かって繋がる一繋がりの部材である。操作部5bは、例えば樹脂製である。操作部5bの上端部51は、例えば略直方体状の部位である。上端部51の上面511は、上下方向に略垂直な平面である。上端部51の上面511の中央部には、下向きに凹む操作凹部が設けられる。連結部52は、上端部51の下端から下方に延び、上端部51と一対の押圧部53bとを連結する。連結部52は、例えば、厚さ方向の幅が左右方向の幅よりも大きい略板状の部位である。 The operation unit 5b includes an upper end portion 51, a connecting portion 52, and a pair of pressing portions 53b. The upper end portion 51, the connecting portion 52, and the pair of pressing portions 53b are connected members that are connected from the upper side to the lower side in this order. The operation unit 5b is made of, for example, resin. The upper end portion 51 of the operation portion 5b is, for example, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped portion. The upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 is a plane substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction. An operation recess that is recessed downward is provided at the center of the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51. The connecting portion 52 extends downward from the lower end of the upper end portion 51, and connects the upper end portion 51 and the pair of pressing portions 53b. The connecting portion 52 is, for example, a substantially plate-shaped portion whose width in the thickness direction is larger than the width in the left-right direction.
 一対の押圧部53bは、連結部52の下端から左右両側の斜め下方に延びる。換言すれば、一対の押圧部53bは、左右方向に離間して配置されて略上下方向に延びる。一対の押圧部53bの左右方向における間隔は、下方に向かうに従って大きくなる。換言すれば、一対の押圧部53bでは、上方に向かうに従って左右方向の間隔(すなわち、一対の押圧部53bの内側面間の左右方向の距離)が小さくなる。一対の押圧部53bの内側面はそれぞれ、上下方向および左右方向に対して傾斜する傾斜面である。挿入穴閉鎖状態では、一対の押圧部53bのうち一方の押圧部53bの下端部は、弾性部材4bの一対の腕部42bのうち一方の腕部42bの左右方向における外側面(すなわち、図14中における上面)に接触する。また、一対の押圧部53bの外側面がケース2の一部に接触することにより、操作部5bの上方への移動が制限される。なお、挿入穴閉鎖状態では、一対の押圧部53bの双方の下端部が、一対の腕部42bの双方の外側面に接触してもよい。換言すれば、挿入穴閉鎖状態では、一対の押圧部53bのうち少なくとも一方の下端部が、一対の腕部42bの少なくとも一方の外側面に接触する。 The pair of pressing portions 53b extend diagonally downward on both the left and right sides from the lower end of the connecting portion 52. In other words, the pair of pressing portions 53b are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction and extend substantially in the vertical direction. The distance between the pair of pressing portions 53b in the left-right direction increases toward the bottom. In other words, in the pair of pressing portions 53b, the distance in the left-right direction (that is, the distance in the left-right direction between the inner side surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 53b) becomes smaller toward the upper side. The inner side surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 53b are inclined surfaces that are inclined with respect to the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, respectively. In the insertion hole closed state, the lower end of one of the pair of pressing portions 53b is the outer surface (that is, FIG. 14) of one of the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b in the left-right direction. Contact the top surface inside). Further, when the outer surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 53b come into contact with a part of the case 2, the upward movement of the operating portion 5b is restricted. In the insertion hole closed state, the lower ends of both of the pair of pressing portions 53b may come into contact with the outer surfaces of both of the pair of arm portions 42b. In other words, in the insertion hole closed state, at least one lower end of the pair of pressing portions 53b comes into contact with at least one outer surface of the pair of arm portions 42b.
 上端部51の左右方向の幅は、上端部51の上下方向の略全長に亘って略一定である。連結部52の左右方向の幅は、連結部52の上下方向の略全長に亘って略一定である。上端部51の左右方向の幅は、連結部52の左右方向の幅よりも大きい。図14中の右側の操作部5bに注目すると、当該操作部5bの上端部51は、連結部52の上端から左側に突出する。一対の押圧部53bの下端の左右方向における間隔は、連結部52の下端の左右方向の幅よりも大きい。連結部52の左右両側の側面は、左右方向に略垂直であり、上下方向に略平行に延びる。 The width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the upper end portion 51 in the vertical direction. The width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the connecting portion 52 in the vertical direction. The width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction. Focusing on the operation unit 5b on the right side in FIG. 14, the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5b projects to the left from the upper end of the connecting portion 52. The distance between the lower ends of the pair of pressing portions 53b in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the lower ends of the connecting portions 52 in the left-right direction. The left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion 52 are substantially perpendicular to the left and right directions, and extend substantially parallel to the vertical direction.
 図14に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態では、操作部5bの上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5bの周囲の領域と略同一平面上に位置する。あるいは、操作部5bの上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5bの周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部(すなわち、当該領域よりも下側)に位置する。また、図15に示すように、操作部5bの厚さ方向の両側面513は、ケース2の厚さ方向の両側面26のうち操作部5bの周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。操作部5bの他の表面についても同様である。換言すれば、図14に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態では、操作部5bの表面は、ケース2の表面のうち操作部5bの周囲の領域(すなわち、移動経路24の周囲の領域)よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。 In the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 14, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5b is located on substantially the same plane as the region around the operating portion 5b in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. Alternatively, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5b is located inside the case 2 (that is, below the region) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 with respect to the region around the operating portion 5b. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, both side surfaces 513 of the operation portion 5b in the thickness direction are located inside the case 2 of the side surfaces 26 in the thickness direction of the case 2 rather than the area around the operation portion 5b. , Or, it is located on substantially the same plane as the area. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5b. In other words, in the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 14, the surface of the operation unit 5b is the surface of the case 2 in the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5b (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
 次に、接続機器1bに対する電線の接続の流れについて、図14、図16ないし図18を参照しつつ説明する。なお、以下では、図中の右側の挿入穴21に電線を接続する際の様子について説明する。図中の左側の挿入穴21に電線を接続する場合については、左右反対向きである点を除き、作業員の動作は略同様である。 Next, the flow of connecting the electric wire to the connecting device 1b will be described with reference to FIGS. 14, 16 to 18. In the following, a state when the electric wire is connected to the insertion hole 21 on the right side in the drawing will be described. When the electric wire is connected to the insertion hole 21 on the left side in the drawing, the operation of the worker is substantially the same except that the directions are opposite to each other.
 まず、図14に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態から操作部5bがケース2の内部に向かって押し込まれ、移動経路24に沿って下方へと移動する。操作部5bが押し込まれる際には、例えば、作業員が通常のマイナスドライバー等の先端を、操作部5bの上端部51の操作凹部に接触させ、当該マイナスドライバーを介して操作部5bに下向きの力を加える。操作部5bの下方への移動に従って、弾性部材4bが撓んで弾性部材4bの形状が変更される。具体的には、図16に示すように、弾性部材4bの一対の腕部42bが、操作部5bの一対の押圧部53bにより下方へと押し下げられ、一対の腕部42bの左右方向における間隔が小さくなる。換言すれば、一対の腕部42bが左右方向において互いに近づく。右側の腕部42bは、端子部3から左側へと離間する。これにより、挿入穴21の下端部が開放される。以下の説明では、図16に示す接続機器1bの状態を「挿入穴開放状態」という。図16に示す状態において、一対の腕部42bの成す角度は、0°よりも大きく、かつ、180°よりも小さい。図16に示す例では、当該角度は90°よりも小さい。 First, the operation unit 5b is pushed toward the inside of the case 2 from the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 14, and moves downward along the movement path 24. When the operation unit 5b is pushed in, for example, a worker brings the tip of a normal flat-blade screwdriver or the like into contact with the operation recess of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5b, and points downward to the operation unit 5b via the flat-blade screwdriver. Apply force. As the operation unit 5b moves downward, the elastic member 4b bends and the shape of the elastic member 4b is changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16, the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b are pushed downward by the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operating portion 5b, and the distance between the pair of arm portions 42b in the left-right direction is increased. It becomes smaller. In other words, the pair of arms 42b approach each other in the left-right direction. The right arm portion 42b is separated from the terminal portion 3 to the left side. As a result, the lower end of the insertion hole 21 is opened. In the following description, the state of the connected device 1b shown in FIG. 16 is referred to as an “insertion hole open state”. In the state shown in FIG. 16, the angle formed by the pair of arm portions 42b is larger than 0 ° and smaller than 180 °. In the example shown in FIG. 16, the angle is less than 90 °.
 図16に示す挿入穴開放状態では、弾性部材4bの一対の腕部42bが、左右方向において互いに近づく方向に撓んだ状態で、操作部5bの一対の押圧部53bの間に挟持される。一対の押圧部53bの内側面は、一対の腕部42bの外側面に接触する。また、一対の腕部42bの下端は、一対の押圧部53bの下端よりも下側に位置する。弾性部材4bの一対の腕部42bには、斜め上方へと戻ろうとする復元力が働く。当該復元力のうち水平方向(すなわち、左右方向)の分力により、一対の押圧部53bの内側面は左右方向(すなわち、互いに離れる方向)に押圧される。一対の押圧部53bは、実質的に弾性変形しないように形成されているため、弾性部材4bの復元力の水平方向分力は、操作部5bの一対の押圧部53bにより受けられる。すなわち、弾性部材4bの復元力が、操作部5bの一対の押圧部53bにより部分的に支持される。したがって、弾性部材4bが操作部5bを上向きに押す力が低減され、操作部5bを下向きに押し込んだ状態で維持するために必要な作業員の力が軽減される。すなわち、接続機器1bでは、一対の腕部42bおよび一対の押圧部53bにより、操作部5bをケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力を低減させる保持力低減機構60bが構成される。なお、一対の押圧部53bにより支持される弾性部材4bの復元力は、弾性部材4bの全復元力よりも小さい。したがって、一対の押圧部53bによる挟持のみにより、弾性部材4bの一対の腕部42bが一対の押圧部53bの間に位置する状態が維持されることはない。 In the state where the insertion hole is opened as shown in FIG. 16, the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b are sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operation portion 5b in a state of being bent in a direction approaching each other in the left-right direction. The inner surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 53b come into contact with the outer surfaces of the pair of arm portions 42b. Further, the lower ends of the pair of arm portions 42b are located below the lower ends of the pair of pressing portions 53b. A restoring force that tries to return diagonally upward acts on the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b. The inner surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 53b are pressed in the left-right direction (that is, in the direction away from each other) by the component force in the horizontal direction (that is, the left-right direction) of the restoring force. Since the pair of pressing portions 53b are formed so as not to be substantially elastically deformed, the horizontal component force of the restoring force of the elastic member 4b is received by the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operating portion 5b. That is, the restoring force of the elastic member 4b is partially supported by the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operating portion 5b. Therefore, the force with which the elastic member 4b pushes the operation portion 5b upward is reduced, and the force of the worker required to maintain the operation portion 5b in the downward pushed state is reduced. That is, in the connecting device 1b, the pair of arm portions 42b and the pair of pressing portions 53b constitute a holding force reducing mechanism 60b that reduces the force for maintaining the operating portion 5b in the case 2 in a pushed state. The restoring force of the elastic member 4b supported by the pair of pressing portions 53b is smaller than the total restoring force of the elastic member 4b. Therefore, the state in which the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b are located between the pair of pressing portions 53b is not maintained only by the pinching by the pair of pressing portions 53b.
 接続機器1bでは、一対の押圧部53bの内側面と一対の腕部42bの外側面との摩擦により、操作部5bを押し込むマイナスドライバーを握る作業員の手に抵抗が生じる。したがって、作業員は、挿入穴閉鎖状態から挿入穴開放状態への移行完了を容易に認識することができる。 In the connected device 1b, the friction between the inner side surface of the pair of pressing portions 53b and the outer surface of the pair of arm portions 42b causes resistance to the hand of the worker holding the flat-blade screwdriver pushing the operating portion 5b. Therefore, the worker can easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state.
 また、接続機器1bでは、図16に示す挿入穴開放状態への移行と略同時に、操作部5bの上端部51の下端が、ケース2の移動経路24内に設けられた上下方向に略垂直な停止面242に上側から接触する。これにより、操作部5bの下方への過剰な移動を制限することができる。また、操作部5bの上端部51と停止面242との接触による手応えおよび/または音の発生により、作業員は、挿入穴閉鎖状態から挿入穴開放状態への移行完了をさらに容易に認識することもできる。 Further, in the connected device 1b, substantially at the same time as the transition to the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. 16, the lower end of the upper end portion 51 of the operation portion 5b is substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction provided in the movement path 24 of the case 2. It contacts the stop surface 242 from above. Thereby, it is possible to limit the excessive movement of the operation unit 5b downward. Further, the operator can more easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state by the response and / or the generation of sound due to the contact between the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5b and the stop surface 242. You can also.
 図16に示す挿入穴開放状態では、操作部5bの上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5bの周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部(すなわち、当該領域よりも下側)に位置する。あるいは、操作部5bの上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5bの周囲の領域と略同一平面上に位置していてもよい。操作部5bの他の表面についても同様である。換言すれば、図16に示す挿入穴開放状態では、操作部5bの表面は、ケース2の表面のうち操作部5bの周囲の領域(すなわち、移動経路24の周囲の領域)よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。 In the state where the insertion hole is open as shown in FIG. 16, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5b is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 than the area around the operation unit 5b. Located on the side). Alternatively, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5b may be located on substantially the same plane as the region around the operating portion 5b in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5b. In other words, in the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. 16, the surface of the operation unit 5b is more of the case 2 than the area of the surface of the case 2 around the operation unit 5b (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
 図16に示す挿入穴開放状態では、弾性部材4bは、後述する結線状態の弾性部材4bよりも撓んでおり、電線を端子部3との間で挟持しない。換言すれば、図16に示す接続機器1bの状態である挿入穴開放状態は、弾性部材4bと端子部3との間の電線の挟持が解除された「非結線状態」である。 In the state where the insertion hole is opened as shown in FIG. 16, the elastic member 4b is more bent than the elastic member 4b in the connected state described later, and does not sandwich the electric wire with the terminal portion 3. In other words, the insertion hole open state, which is the state of the connecting device 1b shown in FIG. 16, is a “non-connection state” in which the pinching of the electric wire between the elastic member 4b and the terminal portion 3 is released.
 続いて、弾性部材4bが挿入穴開放状態にて維持された状態で、電線91が、図16中に二点鎖線にて示すように接続機器1bの挿入穴21に挿入される。電線91は、例えば単線であってもよく、より線であってもよい。また、電線91は、先端部に棒状圧着端子等が設けられたより線であってもよい。電線91の先端部の直径は、例えば、0.42mm以上であることが好ましい。電線91の先端部の直径は、現実的には、2.3mm以下である。電線91の先端部の直径は、様々に変更されてよい。また、電線91の先端部以外の部位の直径も、様々に変更されてよい。 Subsequently, the electric wire 91 is inserted into the insertion hole 21 of the connecting device 1b as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 16 while the elastic member 4b is maintained in the insertion hole open state. The electric wire 91 may be, for example, a single wire or a stranded wire. Further, the electric wire 91 may be a stranded wire provided with a rod-shaped crimp terminal or the like at the tip end portion. The diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is preferably 0.42 mm or more, for example. The diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is practically 2.3 mm or less. The diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways. Further, the diameter of the portion other than the tip end portion of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways.
 電線91は、挿入穴21内にて下方へと移動され、図17に示すように、端子部3と挿入穴開放状態の弾性部材4bとの間に挿入される。その後、操作部5bを押し込む作業員の力が弱められ、弾性部材4bの復元力が、作業員の力と一対の押圧部53bによる支持力との合計よりも大きくなることにより、弾性部材4bの一対の腕部42bが斜め上方へと移動し、図18に示すように、一対の押圧部53bによる挟持から離脱する。 The electric wire 91 is moved downward in the insertion hole 21 and is inserted between the terminal portion 3 and the elastic member 4b in the insertion hole open state as shown in FIG. After that, the force of the worker pushing the operating portion 5b is weakened, and the restoring force of the elastic member 4b becomes larger than the sum of the force of the worker and the supporting force of the pair of pressing portions 53b. The pair of arm portions 42b moves diagonally upward and, as shown in FIG. 18, are released from being pinched by the pair of pressing portions 53b.
 また、弾性部材4bの右側の腕部42bは、電線91に左側から接触する。当該腕部42bは、上記復元力により、電線91を端子部3に押し付けて端子部3との間で挟持する。これにより、電線91と端子部3とが電気的かつ機械的に接続される。換言すれば、電線91が接続機器1bに結線される。以下の説明では、図18に示す状態を「結線状態」という。結線状態の弾性部材4bは、上述のように、電線91を端子部3との間で挟持している。接続機器1bでは、弾性部材4bの一対の腕部42bの上記斜め上方への移動により、操作部5bは、図17に示す挿入穴開放状態から上方に移動し、下端部が弾性部材4bの一対の腕部42bの外側面に接触した状態で停止する。 Further, the right arm portion 42b of the elastic member 4b contacts the electric wire 91 from the left side. The arm portion 42b presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3. As a result, the electric wire 91 and the terminal portion 3 are electrically and mechanically connected. In other words, the electric wire 91 is connected to the connecting device 1b. In the following description, the state shown in FIG. 18 is referred to as a “connection state”. As described above, the elastic member 4b in the connected state sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3. In the connecting device 1b, due to the diagonally upward movement of the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b, the operation portion 5b moves upward from the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. Stops in contact with the outer surface of the arm portion 42b.
 図18に示す結線状態では、操作部5bの上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5bの周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部(すなわち、当該領域よりも下側)に位置する。あるいは、操作部5bの上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5bの周囲の領域と略同一平面上に位置していてもよい。操作部5bの他の表面についても同様である。換言すれば、図18に示す結線状態では、操作部5bの表面は、ケース2の表面のうち操作部5bの周囲の領域(すなわち、移動経路24の周囲の領域)よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。 In the wiring state shown in FIG. 18, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5b is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 than the area around the operation unit 5b. Located in. Alternatively, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5b may be located on substantially the same plane as the region around the operating portion 5b in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5b. In other words, in the wiring state shown in FIG. 18, the surface of the operation unit 5b is inside the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5b (that is, the area around the movement path 24) in the surface of the case 2. It is located or is located substantially in the same plane as the area.
 なお、図18に示す結線状態において、図18中の上側が重力方向下側となるように接続機器1bが配置されている場合、操作部5bは、重力により弾性部材4bから図中の上方に離間する。そして、操作部5bの一対の押圧部53bが、図14に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態と同様に、ケース2の一部に係止され、操作部5bの上方への移動が制限される。したがって、操作部5bが図14に示す位置よりも上側へと移動することが防止される。 In the connection state shown in FIG. 18, when the connecting device 1b is arranged so that the upper side in FIG. 18 is the lower side in the direction of gravity, the operation unit 5b is moved upward in the drawing from the elastic member 4b due to gravity. Separate. Then, the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operating portion 5b are locked to a part of the case 2 as in the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 14, and the upward movement of the operating portion 5b is restricted. Therefore, it is prevented that the operation unit 5b moves upward from the position shown in FIG.
 電線91を接続機器1bから取り外す際には、例えば、作業員が通常のマイナスドライバー等の先端を、操作部5bの上端部51の操作凹部に接触させ、当該マイナスドライバーを介して操作部5bに下向きの力を加える。そして、操作部5bを下方に移動し、図17に示すように挿入穴開放状態とする。挿入穴開放状態では、上述のように、弾性部材4bは撓んで右側の腕部42bは電線91から左側へと離間する。換言すれば、弾性部材4bおよび端子部3による電線91の挟持が解除される。また、弾性部材4bの一対の腕部42bは、操作部5bの一対の押圧部53bにより挟持され、弾性部材4bの復元力の一部が一対の押圧部53bにより支持される。 When removing the electric wire 91 from the connecting device 1b, for example, a worker brings the tip of a normal flat-blade screwdriver or the like into contact with the operating recess of the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5b, and makes the operating portion 5b via the flat-blade screwdriver. Apply a downward force. Then, the operation unit 5b is moved downward to open the insertion hole as shown in FIG. In the state where the insertion hole is open, as described above, the elastic member 4b bends and the right arm portion 42b is separated from the electric wire 91 to the left side. In other words, the sandwiching of the electric wire 91 by the elastic member 4b and the terminal portion 3 is released. Further, the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b are sandwiched by the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operating portion 5b, and a part of the restoring force of the elastic member 4b is supported by the pair of pressing portions 53b.
 このときも、上記と同様に、作業員は、接続機器1bが挿入穴開放状態(すなわち、非結線状態)となったことを容易に認識することができる。また、操作部5bの上端部51と停止面242との接触による手応えおよび/または音の発生により、接続機器1bが挿入穴開放状態(すなわち、非結線状態)となったことをさらに容易に認識することができる。 At this time as well, the worker can easily recognize that the connected device 1b is in the insertion hole open state (that is, the unconnected state). Further, it is more easily recognized that the connected device 1b is in the insertion hole open state (that is, the unconnected state) due to the response and / or the generation of sound due to the contact between the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5b and the stop surface 242. can do.
 接続機器1bでは、弾性部材4bは、図14に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態と、図16および図17に示す挿入穴開放状態と、図18に示す結線状態との間で変形可能である。以下の説明では、図18に示すように、結線状態の弾性部材4bに接触する操作部5bの位置を「第1位置」と呼ぶ。また、図16および図17に示すように、挿入穴開放状態(すなわち、非結線状態)の弾性部材4bに接触する操作部5bの位置を「第2位置」と呼ぶ。さらに、図14に示すように、一対の押圧部53bがケース2の一部に係止される操作部5bの位置を「第3位置」と呼ぶ。 In the connecting device 1b, the elastic member 4b can be deformed between the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 14, the insertion hole open state shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and the connection state shown in FIG. In the following description, as shown in FIG. 18, the position of the operating portion 5b in contact with the elastic member 4b in the connected state is referred to as a “first position”. Further, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the position of the operating portion 5b that comes into contact with the elastic member 4b in the insertion hole open state (that is, the non-connection state) is referred to as a “second position”. Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the position of the operating portion 5b in which the pair of pressing portions 53b are locked to a part of the case 2 is referred to as a "third position".
 上述の移動経路24は、操作部5bの第3位置、第1位置および第2位置をこの順に結ぶ。第3位置は、移動経路24において、第1位置を挟んで第2位置とは反対側に位置する。第2位置では、上述のように、弾性部材4bの一対の腕部42bが、操作部5bの一対の押圧部53bにより挟持される。第3位置では、一対の押圧部53bがケース2の一部に係止されることにより、操作部5bの上方への移動(すなわち、第2位置から離れる方向への移動)が制限される。なお、第3位置では、操作部5bの一部がケース2の一部に係止していればよく、必ずしも一対の押圧部53bがケース2の一部に係止する必要はない。 The above-mentioned movement path 24 connects the third position, the first position, and the second position of the operation unit 5b in this order. The third position is located on the movement path 24 on the opposite side of the first position from the second position. At the second position, as described above, the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b are sandwiched by the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operating portion 5b. At the third position, the pair of pressing portions 53b are locked to a part of the case 2, so that the upward movement of the operating portion 5b (that is, the movement in the direction away from the second position) is restricted. At the third position, it is sufficient that a part of the operating portion 5b is locked to a part of the case 2, and the pair of pressing portions 53b do not necessarily have to be locked to a part of the case 2.
 以上に説明したように、電線91が接続される接続機器1bは、ケース2と、端子部3と、弾性部材4bと、操作部5bとを備える。端子部3は、導電性であり、ケース2に固定される。弾性部材4bは、ケース2に取り付けられる。弾性部材4bは、復元力により電線91を端子部3に押し付けて挟持する。操作部5bは、ケース2に設けられた上下方向に延びる移動経路24に沿って移動することにより、弾性部材4bの形状を変更する。 As described above, the connecting device 1b to which the electric wire 91 is connected includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4b, and an operating portion 5b. The terminal portion 3 is conductive and is fixed to the case 2. The elastic member 4b is attached to the case 2. The elastic member 4b presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91. The operation unit 5b changes the shape of the elastic member 4b by moving along a movement path 24 extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2.
 弾性部材4bは、電線91を端子部3との間で挟持している結線状態と、結線状態よりも撓んで端子部3との間の電線91の挟持が解除された非結線状態(すなわち、挿入穴開放状態)との間で変形可能である。操作部5bは、第1位置において結線状態の弾性部材4bに接触する。操作部5bは、弾性部材4bとの接触状態を維持しつつ、第1位置よりも下側の第2位置へと押し込まれることにより、弾性部材4bを非結線状態へと変形させる。接続機器1bは、操作部5bが第2位置に位置する状態において、操作部5bをケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力を低減させる保持力低減機構60bをさらに備える。これにより、接続機器1bを非結線状態で維持する力を低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1bの操作性を向上することができる。 The elastic member 4b is in a connected state in which the electric wire 91 is sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 and a non-connected state in which the electric wire 91 is released from being sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 by being bent more than the connected state (that is,). It can be deformed with the insertion hole open state). The operation unit 5b comes into contact with the elastic member 4b in the connected state at the first position. The operating unit 5b deforms the elastic member 4b into a non-wired state by being pushed into the second position below the first position while maintaining the contact state with the elastic member 4b. The connecting device 1b further includes a holding force reducing mechanism 60b that reduces the force for maintaining the operating unit 5b in a state of being pushed into the case 2 when the operating unit 5b is located at the second position. As a result, the force for maintaining the connected device 1b in the unconnected state can be reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1b can be improved.
 上述のように、好ましくは、弾性部材4bは、上端に位置する折り曲げ部(すなわち、中央部41)と、一対の腕部42bと、を備える板バネである。一対の腕部42bは、中央部41の左右両側において下方に延びる。一対の腕部42bの左右方向の間隔は、下方に向かうに従って大きくなる。操作部5bは、左右方向に離間して配置されて上下方向に延びる一対の押圧部53bを備える。一対の押圧部53bの左右方向の間隔は上方に向かうに従って小さくなる。保持力低減機構60bは、一対の腕部42bおよび一対の押圧部53bを備える。操作部5bが第1位置に位置する状態では、一対の押圧部53bのうち少なくとも一方の下端部が、一対の腕部42bのうち少なくとも一方の外側面に接触する。操作部5bが第2位置に位置する状態では、一対の腕部42bが、左右方向において互いに近づく方向に撓んだ状態で、一対の押圧部53bの間に挟持される。これにより、操作部5bをケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力を、簡素な構造によって低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1bの操作性を容易に向上することができる。 As described above, preferably, the elastic member 4b is a leaf spring including a bent portion (that is, a central portion 41) located at the upper end and a pair of arm portions 42b. The pair of arm portions 42b extend downward on both the left and right sides of the central portion 41. The distance between the pair of arms 42b in the left-right direction increases downward. The operation unit 5b includes a pair of pressing units 53b that are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction and extend in the vertical direction. The distance between the pair of pressing portions 53b in the left-right direction becomes smaller toward the upper side. The holding force reducing mechanism 60b includes a pair of arm portions 42b and a pair of pressing portions 53b. When the operating portion 5b is located at the first position, at least one lower end of the pair of pressing portions 53b comes into contact with the outer surface of at least one of the pair of arm portions 42b. In the state where the operating portion 5b is located at the second position, the pair of arm portions 42b are sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions 53b in a state of being bent in the direction of approaching each other in the left-right direction. As a result, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5b in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state) can be reduced by a simple structure. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1b can be easily improved.
 上述のように、接続機器1bでは、好ましくは、非結線状態の弾性部材4bの復元力により、一対の押圧部53bの内側面が一対の腕部42bにより左右方向に押圧され、一対の押圧部53bは、弾性部材4bの復元力を部分的に支持する。このため、非結線状態の接続機器1bに電線91を結線する際に、マイナスドライバー等により操作部5bを下向きに押す力を緩めることにより、操作部5bを第2位置から第1位置へと容易に移動させ、弾性部材4bの腕部42bと端子部3との間に電線91を容易に挟持させることができる。また、接続機器1bから電線91を抜き取った後、弾性部材4bを非結線状態(すなわち、挿入穴開放状態)から挿入穴閉鎖状態へと戻す際にも同様に、マイナスドライバー等により操作部5bを下向きに押す力を緩めることにより、操作部5bを第2位置から第3位置へと容易に移動させることができる。したがって、電線91の結線の際、あるいは、電線91の結線解除の際に、マイナスドライバー等を移動経路24に繰り返し挿入する必要がないため、接続機器1bの操作性を向上することができる。 As described above, in the connected device 1b, preferably, the inner surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 53b are pressed in the left-right direction by the pair of arm portions 42b by the restoring force of the elastic member 4b in the unconnected state, and the pair of pressing portions 53b partially supports the restoring force of the elastic member 4b. Therefore, when the electric wire 91 is connected to the connected device 1b in the unconnected state, the operation unit 5b can be easily moved from the second position to the first position by relaxing the force for pushing the operation unit 5b downward with a flat-blade screwdriver or the like. The electric wire 91 can be easily sandwiched between the arm portion 42b and the terminal portion 3 of the elastic member 4b. Similarly, when the elastic member 4b is returned from the unconnected state (that is, the insertion hole open state) to the insertion hole closed state after the electric wire 91 is pulled out from the connecting device 1b, the operation unit 5b is similarly moved by a flat-blade screwdriver or the like. By loosening the downward pushing force, the operation unit 5b can be easily moved from the second position to the third position. Therefore, when connecting the electric wire 91 or disconnecting the electric wire 91, it is not necessary to repeatedly insert a flat-blade screwdriver or the like into the moving path 24, so that the operability of the connected device 1b can be improved.
 上述のように、操作部5bが第2位置に位置する状態では、一対の腕部42bの成す角度は、0°よりも大きく、かつ、180°よりも小さい。これにより、一対の押圧部53bに挟持された状態の弾性部材4bにおいて、弾性部材4bの復元力が、一対の押圧部53bにより支持される水平成分と、操作部5bを上方へと押し返す垂直成分とを有する。したがって、操作部5bをケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力を低減することができるとともに、操作部5bを押し込む力を緩めた際の一対の腕部42bの斜め上方への移動を可能とすることができる。なお、この場合、操作部5bが第2位置に位置する状態において、一対の腕部42bの下端は、一対の押圧部53bの下端と同じ位置であってもよく、一対の押圧部53bの下端よりも上側または下側に位置していてもよい。 As described above, in the state where the operating portion 5b is located at the second position, the angle formed by the pair of arm portions 42b is larger than 0 ° and smaller than 180 °. As a result, in the elastic member 4b sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions 53b, the restoring force of the elastic member 4b is a horizontal component supported by the pair of pressing portions 53b and a vertical component that pushes the operating portion 5b upward. And have. Therefore, the force for maintaining the operating portion 5b in the case 2 in the pushed state (that is, the unconnected state) can be reduced, and the pair of arm portions 42b when the force for pushing the operating portion 5b is relaxed can be slanted. It can be moved upwards. In this case, in the state where the operation unit 5b is located at the second position, the lower ends of the pair of arm portions 42b may be at the same position as the lower ends of the pair of pressing portions 53b, and the lower ends of the pair of pressing portions 53b. It may be located above or below.
 上述のように、操作部5bが第2位置に位置する状態では、一対の腕部42bの下端は、一対の押圧部53bの下端よりも下側に位置する。これにより、一対の押圧部53bに挟持された状態の弾性部材4bにおいて、弾性部材4bの復元力が、一対の押圧部53bにより支持される水平成分と、操作部5bを上方へと押し返す垂直成分とを有する。したがって、操作部5bをケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力を低減することができるとともに、操作部5bを押し込む力を緩めた際の一対の腕部42bの斜め上方への移動を可能とすることができる。なお、この場合、操作部5bが第2位置に位置する状態において、一対の腕部42bの成す角度は0°であってもよい。接続機器1bでは、操作部5bが第2位置に位置する状態では、一対の腕部42bの成す角度が0°よりも大きくかつ180°よりも小さいこと、および、一対の腕部42bの下端が一対の押圧部53bの下端よりも下側に位置することのうち、少なくとも一方が満たされていることが好ましい。 As described above, in the state where the operation portion 5b is located at the second position, the lower ends of the pair of arm portions 42b are located below the lower ends of the pair of pressing portions 53b. As a result, in the elastic member 4b sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions 53b, the restoring force of the elastic member 4b is a horizontal component supported by the pair of pressing portions 53b and a vertical component that pushes the operating portion 5b upward. And have. Therefore, the force for maintaining the operating portion 5b in the case 2 in the pushed state (that is, the unconnected state) can be reduced, and the pair of arm portions 42b when the force for pushing the operating portion 5b is relaxed can be slanted. It can be moved upwards. In this case, the angle formed by the pair of arm portions 42b may be 0 ° in the state where the operating portion 5b is located at the second position. In the connected device 1b, when the operation unit 5b is located at the second position, the angle formed by the pair of arm portions 42b is larger than 0 ° and smaller than 180 °, and the lower ends of the pair of arm portions 42b are formed. It is preferable that at least one of the pair of pressing portions 53b located below the lower ends is satisfied.
 接続機器1bでは、図19に示すように、一対の押圧部53bの左右方向の間隔(すなわち、一対の押圧部53bの内側面間の左右方向の距離)は、上下方向の略全長に亘って略一定であってもよい。図19に例示するように、操作部5bが第2位置に位置する状態では、一対の腕部42bの下端は、一対の押圧部53bの下端よりも下側に位置する。一対の腕部42bは、左右方向において互いに近づく方向に撓んだ状態で、一対の押圧部53bの間に挟持される。これにより、上記と同様に、操作部5bをケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力を低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1bの操作性を向上することができる。すなわち、接続機器1bでは、操作部5bは、左右方向に離間して配置されて上下方向に延びるとともに、上方に向かうに従って左右方向の間隔が小さくなる、または、左右方向の間隔が一定な一対の押圧部53bを備えていればよい。 In the connected device 1b, as shown in FIG. 19, the distance between the pair of pressing portions 53b in the left-right direction (that is, the distance in the left-right direction between the inner side surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 53b) extends over substantially the entire length in the vertical direction. It may be substantially constant. As illustrated in FIG. 19, when the operating portion 5b is located at the second position, the lower ends of the pair of arm portions 42b are located below the lower ends of the pair of pressing portions 53b. The pair of arm portions 42b are sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions 53b in a state of being bent in a direction approaching each other in the left-right direction. As a result, similarly to the above, it is possible to reduce the force for maintaining the operation unit 5b in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state). As a result, the operability of the connected device 1b can be improved. That is, in the connected device 1b, the operation units 5b are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction and extend in the vertical direction, and the distance in the left-right direction becomes smaller toward the upper side, or the distance in the left-right direction is constant. The pressing portion 53b may be provided.
 接続機器1bでは、図20に示すように、操作部5bの一対の押圧部53bの内側面に凸部531が設けられ、弾性部材4bの一対の腕部42bに凹部421が設けられてもよい。当該凹部421は、操作部5bが上述の第2位置に位置する状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で、押圧部53bの凸部531と嵌合する。これにより、操作部5bをケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。なお、凸部531は一方の押圧部53bのみに設けられ、凹部421も一方の腕部42bのみに設けられてもよい。 In the connected device 1b, as shown in FIG. 20, a convex portion 531 may be provided on the inner surface of the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operating portion 5b, and a concave portion 421 may be provided on the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b. .. The concave portion 421 fits with the convex portion 531 of the pressing portion 53b in a state where the operating portion 5b is located at the above-mentioned second position (that is, in a non-connection state). As a result, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5b in the case 2 in the pushed state can be further reduced. The convex portion 531 may be provided only on one pressing portion 53b, and the concave portion 421 may be provided only on one arm portion 42b.
 また、接続機器1bでは、操作部5bの一対の押圧部53bに凹部が設けられ、弾性部材4bの一対の腕部42bに凸部が設けられてもよい。換言すれば、接続機器1bでは、一対の押圧部53bおよび一対の腕部42bのうち一方が凸部を有し、一対の押圧部53bおよび一対の腕部42bのうち他方が、操作部5bが第2位置に位置する状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で当該凸部と嵌合する凹部を有することが好ましい。これにより、上述のように、操作部5bをケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1bの操作性をさらに向上することができる。なお、この場合であっても、操作部5bを押し込む力を緩めると、弾性部材4bの復元力により、操作部5bは上方へと移動し、一対の腕部42bは斜め上方へと移動する。 Further, in the connecting device 1b, the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operating portion 5b may be provided with a concave portion, and the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b may be provided with a convex portion. In other words, in the connected device 1b, one of the pair of pressing portions 53b and the pair of arm portions 42b has a convex portion, and the other of the pair of pressing portions 53b and the pair of arm portions 42b has the operating portion 5b. It is preferable to have a concave portion that fits with the convex portion in a state of being located at the second position (that is, a non-connection state). As a result, as described above, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5b in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state) can be further reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1b can be further improved. Even in this case, when the force for pushing the operating portion 5b is relaxed, the operating portion 5b moves upward and the pair of arm portions 42b moves diagonally upward due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4b.
 接続機器1bでは、図21に太線にて示すように、一対の押圧部53bの内側面に粗面部532が設けられ、一対の腕部42bの外側面に粗面部422が設けられてもよい。粗面部532および粗面部422はそれぞれ、周囲の部位よりも表面粗度が大きい領域である。粗面部532と粗面部422とが接触することにより、一対の押圧部53bと一対の腕部42bとの間の摩擦抵抗が増大するため、操作部5bをケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。なお、粗面部532は一方の押圧部53bのみに設けられ、粗面部422も一方の腕部42bのみに設けられてもよい。 In the connected device 1b, as shown by a thick line in FIG. 21, a rough surface portion 532 may be provided on the inner side surface of the pair of pressing portions 53b, and a rough surface portion 422 may be provided on the outer surface of the pair of arm portions 42b. The rough surface portion 532 and the rough surface portion 422 are regions having a surface roughness larger than that of the surrounding portions, respectively. When the rough surface portion 532 and the rough surface portion 422 come into contact with each other, the frictional resistance between the pair of pressing portions 53b and the pair of arm portions 42b increases, so that the operating portion 5b is maintained in the state of being pushed into the case 2. The force can be further reduced. The rough surface portion 532 may be provided only on one pressing portion 53b, and the rough surface portion 422 may also be provided on only one arm portion 42b.
 接続機器1bでは、一対の押圧部53bの内側面、および、一対の腕部42bの外側面のうち、少なくとも一方の面が粗面部を有していればよい。この場合であっても、一対の押圧部53bと一対の腕部42bとの間の摩擦抵抗が増大するため、操作部5bをケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1bの操作性をさらに向上することができる。なお、この場合であっても、操作部5bを押し込む力を緩めると、弾性部材4bの復元力により、操作部5bは上方へと移動し、一対の腕部42bは斜め上方へと移動する。 In the connected device 1b, at least one of the inner side surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 53b and the outer surfaces of the pair of arm portions 42b may have a rough surface portion. Even in this case, since the frictional resistance between the pair of pressing portions 53b and the pair of arm portions 42b increases, the operating portion 5b is maintained in a state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, in a non-wired state). The force can be further reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1b can be further improved. Even in this case, when the force for pushing the operating portion 5b is relaxed, the operating portion 5b moves upward and the pair of arm portions 42b moves diagonally upward due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4b.
 図22は、上述の例とは異なる形状の弾性部材4cを備える接続機器1bの一部を拡大して示す断面図である。弾性部材4cでは、中央部41と一対の腕部42bとの間に、一対の中間部43bが設けられている。一対の中間部43bはそれぞれ、中央部41から斜め上方へと延びる。一対の腕部42bは、一対の中間部43bの上端部から斜め下方へと延びる。一対の中間部43bは、中央部41から斜め下方へと延びた後、上向きに湾曲して斜め上方へと延びてもよい。換言すれば、弾性部材4cでは、一対の腕部42bの間の部位は、中央部41を左右方向の中心として湾曲し、または、波うっている。 FIG. 22 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the connecting device 1b provided with the elastic member 4c having a shape different from the above example. In the elastic member 4c, a pair of intermediate portions 43b are provided between the central portion 41 and the pair of arm portions 42b. Each of the pair of intermediate portions 43b extends obliquely upward from the central portion 41. The pair of arm portions 42b extend obliquely downward from the upper end portions of the pair of intermediate portions 43b. The pair of intermediate portions 43b may extend diagonally downward from the central portion 41 and then bend upward and extend diagonally upward. In other words, in the elastic member 4c, the portion between the pair of arm portions 42b is curved or wavy with the central portion 41 as the center in the left-right direction.
 図23は、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る接続機器1dの斜視図である。図24は、接続機器1dの断面図である。図25は、接続機器1dを図24中のXXV-XXVの位置にて切断した断面図である。図26は、接続機器1dの分解斜視図である。接続機器1dは、電線91が接続されるプッシュイン式の接続機器である。接続機器1dは、例えば、制御盤等の端子台に利用される。図23では、接続機器1dの手前側に薄板状のエンドプレート11が取り付けられている。また、図23では、複数の接続機器1dが連結された状態を二点鎖線にて示す。図24ないし図26では、電線91が接続機器1dに挿入されていない状態を示す。図24では、断面よりも奥側の構成についても併せて図示している。以下の説明では、接続機器1dの構成のうち、図1ないし図4に示す接続機器1の構成に対応するものに同符号を付す。 FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the connecting device 1d according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view of the connected device 1d. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view of the connected device 1d cut at the position of XXV-XXV in FIG. 24. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the connected device 1d. The connecting device 1d is a push-in type connecting device to which the electric wire 91 is connected. The connected device 1d is used, for example, as a terminal block such as a control panel. In FIG. 23, a thin plate-shaped end plate 11 is attached to the front side of the connecting device 1d. Further, in FIG. 23, a state in which a plurality of connected devices 1d are connected is shown by a two-dot chain line. 24 to 26 show a state in which the electric wire 91 is not inserted into the connecting device 1d. In FIG. 24, the configuration on the back side of the cross section is also shown. In the following description, among the configurations of the connected device 1d, those corresponding to the configuration of the connected device 1 shown in FIGS. 1 to 4 are designated by the same reference numerals.
 以下の説明では、図24中の上下方向および左右方向を、単に「上下方向」および「左右方向」とも呼ぶ。また、図24において紙面に垂直な方向を「厚さ方向」とも呼ぶ。図24は、接続機器1dの厚さ方向の略中央における断面を示す。当該上下方向、左右方向および厚さ方向は、接続機器1dが使用される際の取付方向とは必ずしも一致する必要はない。また、当該上下方向は、重力方向とも必ずしも一致する必要はない。 In the following description, the vertical direction and the horizontal direction in FIG. 24 are also simply referred to as "vertical direction" and "horizontal direction". Further, in FIG. 24, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface is also referred to as a "thickness direction". FIG. 24 shows a cross section of the connected device 1d at substantially the center in the thickness direction. The vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the thickness direction do not necessarily have to coincide with the mounting direction when the connected device 1d is used. Further, the vertical direction does not necessarily have to coincide with the direction of gravity.
 接続機器1dは、ケース2と、端子部3と、弾性部材4と、操作部5とを備える。ケース2は、端子部3、弾性部材4および操作部5を内部に収容する。ケース2は、例えば樹脂製である。図24に示す例では、ケース2には、それぞれに電線が挿入可能な2つの挿入穴21が設けられる。また、ケース2の内部には、2つの端子部3と、2つの弾性部材4と、2つの操作部5とが収容されている。換言すれば、接続機器1dは、2セットの端子部3、弾性部材4および操作部5を備える。なお、接続機器1dは、1セットまたは3セット以上の端子部3、弾性部材4および操作部5を備えていてもよい。 The connecting device 1d includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5. The case 2 houses the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 inside. The case 2 is made of resin, for example. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the case 2 is provided with two insertion holes 21 into which electric wires can be inserted. Further, inside the case 2, two terminal portions 3, two elastic members 4, and two operating portions 5 are housed. In other words, the connecting device 1d includes two sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5. The connecting device 1d may include one set or three or more sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4, and an operation portion 5.
 端子部3、弾性部材4および操作部5の各セットは、挿入穴21に対応して配置される。2セットの端子部3、弾性部材4および操作部5は、形状および大きさ等は互いに同じであり、左右反対向きに配置される。図24中の右側の挿入穴21に注目すると、端子部3は、挿入穴21の下端部の右側に位置し、挿入穴21の下端部から下方に延びる。弾性部材4は、挿入穴21の下端部から左側へと延び、さらに下方へと延びる。操作部5は、挿入穴21の左側において、弾性部材4の上側に配置される。 Each set of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 is arranged corresponding to the insertion hole 21. The two sets of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 have the same shape and size, and are arranged in opposite directions. Focusing on the insertion hole 21 on the right side in FIG. 24, the terminal portion 3 is located on the right side of the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21 and extends downward from the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21. The elastic member 4 extends from the lower end of the insertion hole 21 to the left side and further downward. The operation unit 5 is arranged on the left side of the insertion hole 21 and above the elastic member 4.
 端子部3は、ケース2に固定された導電性の部材である。端子部3は、例えば金属製である。図24中の右側の端子部3は、図24中の左側の端子部3と電気的に接続されている。図24ないし図26に示す例では、当該2つの端子部3は一繋がりの部材である。具体的には、2つの端子部3の下端部が、左右方向に延びる導電性の端子接続部32により接続されている。 The terminal portion 3 is a conductive member fixed to the case 2. The terminal portion 3 is made of metal, for example. The right terminal portion 3 in FIG. 24 is electrically connected to the left terminal portion 3 in FIG. 24. In the example shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the two terminal portions 3 are connected members. Specifically, the lower ends of the two terminal portions 3 are connected by a conductive terminal connecting portion 32 extending in the left-right direction.
 弾性部材4は、ケース2に取り付けられた弾性変形可能な部材である。図24ないし図26に示す例では、弾性部材4は、略帯状の板バネである。弾性部材4は、例えば金属製である。弾性部材4は、導電材料により形成されてもよく、樹脂等の絶縁材料により形成されてもよい。弾性部材4は、例えば、長手方向の中央部41にて略L字状、略V字状または略U字状に折り曲げられた形状を有する。弾性部材4は、中央部41をケース2により挟まれることにより、両端部を略下側に向けた状態でケース2に取り付けられる。以下の説明では、ケース2のうち中央部41に下側から接する部位22を、「支持部22」と呼ぶ。支持部22は、弾性部材4の中央部41から略下方に延びる。 The elastic member 4 is an elastically deformable member attached to the case 2. In the example shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the elastic member 4 is a substantially strip-shaped leaf spring. The elastic member 4 is made of metal, for example. The elastic member 4 may be formed of a conductive material or an insulating material such as a resin. The elastic member 4 has, for example, a shape that is bent into a substantially L-shape, a substantially V-shape, or a substantially U-shape at the central portion 41 in the longitudinal direction. The elastic member 4 is attached to the case 2 with both ends facing substantially downward by sandwiching the central portion 41 between the cases 2. In the following description, the portion 22 of the case 2 that contacts the central portion 41 from below is referred to as a “support portion 22”. The support portion 22 extends substantially downward from the central portion 41 of the elastic member 4.
 図24中の右側の弾性部材4に注目すると、当該弾性部材4のうち、中央部41から支持部22の左側に延びる部位42は、支持部22とケース2の他の部位との間に挟まれることにより、ケース2に固定されている。また、当該弾性部材4のうち、中央部41から支持部22の右側に延びる部位43は、上下方向に延びる端子部3に接触している。弾性部材4の部位43は、操作部5により下方に押されることにより、支持部22の上端部を支点として弾性変形して下向きに撓む。また、当該部位43に対する下向きの押圧力がなくなると、部位43は復元力により元の状態に戻る(すなわち、弾性復帰する)。以下の説明では、弾性部材4の部位42および部位43をそれぞれ、「固定部42」および「可動部43」と呼ぶ。固定部42と可動部43とは、中央部41を通る中心線に対して略線対称である。可動部43は、固定部42の上端から斜め下方に延びる。 Focusing on the elastic member 4 on the right side in FIG. 24, the portion 42 of the elastic member 4 extending from the central portion 41 to the left side of the support portion 22 is sandwiched between the support portion 22 and another portion of the case 2. Therefore, it is fixed to the case 2. Further, among the elastic members 4, the portion 43 extending from the central portion 41 to the right side of the support portion 22 is in contact with the terminal portion 3 extending in the vertical direction. When the portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the operating portion 5, it elastically deforms with the upper end portion of the support portion 22 as a fulcrum and bends downward. Further, when the downward pressing force on the portion 43 disappears, the portion 43 returns to its original state (that is, elastically returns) due to the restoring force. In the following description, the portion 42 and the portion 43 of the elastic member 4 will be referred to as a "fixed portion 42" and a "movable portion 43", respectively. The fixed portion 42 and the movable portion 43 are substantially line-symmetrical with respect to the center line passing through the central portion 41. The movable portion 43 extends obliquely downward from the upper end of the fixed portion 42.
 図24に示す状態では、弾性部材4の可動部43の先端が、上述のように、挿入穴21よりも下側において端子部3に接触し、挿入穴21の下端部を下側から閉鎖している。以下の説明では、図24に示す状態を「挿入穴閉鎖状態」と呼ぶ。また、挿入穴閉鎖状態は、挿入穴21に電線が挿入される前の状態、すなわち、接続機器1dが使用される前の初期状態である。 In the state shown in FIG. 24, as described above, the tip of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 contacts the terminal portion 3 below the insertion hole 21, and the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21 is closed from below. ing. In the following description, the state shown in FIG. 24 is referred to as an “insertion hole closed state”. The insertion hole closed state is a state before the electric wire is inserted into the insertion hole 21, that is, an initial state before the connecting device 1d is used.
 挿入穴閉鎖状態(すなわち、初期状態)の弾性部材4は、固定部42と可動部43とが近づく向きに少し撓んでいる。これにより、弾性部材4がケース2から脱落することを防止することができる。なお、図24中の左側には、撓みの無い状態の弾性部材4を二点鎖線にて示す。 The elastic member 4 in the insertion hole closed state (that is, the initial state) is slightly bent in the direction in which the fixed portion 42 and the movable portion 43 approach each other. This makes it possible to prevent the elastic member 4 from falling off from the case 2. On the left side in FIG. 24, the elastic member 4 in a non-flexible state is shown by a chain double-dashed line.
 操作部5は、上下方向に延びる略柱状または略板状の部材である。操作部5は、ケース2に設けられた上下方向に延びる穴部(以下、「移動経路24」と呼ぶ。)の内部に位置する。操作部5は、移動経路24に沿って上下方向に移動可能である。移動経路24は、ケース2の上面25に開口し、当該上面25から略下方に延びる。 The operation unit 5 is a substantially columnar or substantially plate-shaped member extending in the vertical direction. The operation unit 5 is located inside a hole portion (hereinafter, referred to as “movement path 24”) extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2. The operation unit 5 can move in the vertical direction along the movement path 24. The movement path 24 opens to the upper surface 25 of the case 2 and extends substantially downward from the upper surface 25.
 操作部5は、上端部51と、連結部52と、下端部53とを備える。上端部51、連結部52および下端部53は、この順序で上側から下側に向かって繋がる一繋がりの部材である。操作部5は、例えば樹脂製である。操作部5の上端部51は、例えば略直方体状の部位である。上端部51の上面511は、上下方向に略垂直な平面である。上端部51の上面511の中央部には、下向きに凹む操作凹部が設けられる。連結部52は、上端部51の下端から下方に延び、上端部51と下端部53とを連結する。連結部52は、例えば、厚さ方向の幅が左右方向の幅よりも大きい略板状の部位である。下端部53は、連結部52の下端から下方に延びる。下端部53は、例えば、略板状または略柱状の部位である。 The operation unit 5 includes an upper end portion 51, a connecting portion 52, and a lower end portion 53. The upper end portion 51, the connecting portion 52, and the lower end portion 53 are one-connected members that are connected from the upper side to the lower side in this order. The operation unit 5 is made of resin, for example. The upper end portion 51 of the operation portion 5 is, for example, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped portion. The upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 is a plane substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction. An operation recess that is recessed downward is provided at the center of the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51. The connecting portion 52 extends downward from the lower end of the upper end portion 51, and connects the upper end portion 51 and the lower end portion 53. The connecting portion 52 is, for example, a substantially plate-shaped portion whose width in the thickness direction is larger than the width in the left-right direction. The lower end 53 extends downward from the lower end of the connecting 52. The lower end portion 53 is, for example, a substantially plate-shaped or substantially columnar portion.
 上端部51の左右方向の幅は、上端部51の上下方向の略全長に亘って略一定である。連結部52の左右方向の幅は、連結部52の上下方向の略全長に亘って略一定である。下端部53の左右方向の幅は、下端部53の上部において略一定であり、当該上部から下方に向かうに従って漸次減少する。上端部51の左右方向の幅は、連結部52の左右方向の幅よりも大きい。下端部53の上端の左右方向の幅は、連結部52の下端の左右方向の幅よりも大きい。連結部52の左右両側の側面は、左右方向に略垂直であり、上下方向に略平行に延びる。 The width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the upper end portion 51 in the vertical direction. The width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the connecting portion 52 in the vertical direction. The width of the lower end portion 53 in the left-right direction is substantially constant at the upper portion of the lower end portion 53, and gradually decreases from the upper portion toward the lower side. The width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction. The width of the upper end of the lower end 53 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the lower end of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction. The left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion 52 are substantially perpendicular to the left and right directions, and extend substantially parallel to the vertical direction.
 図24中の右側の操作部5に注目すると、当該操作部5の上端部51は、連結部52の上端から左側に突出する。操作部5の下端部53の左側の側面は、上端から上下方向に略平行に下方へと延び、その後、下方に向かうに従って右側へと向かう。弾性部材4は、下端部53の左側の側面と部分的に接触する。操作部5の下端部53は、連結部52の下端から右側に突出する。これにより、連結部52の下端(すなわち、下端部53の上端)に、右側へと突出する操作段差部55が形成される。 Focusing on the operation unit 5 on the right side in FIG. 24, the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 projects to the left from the upper end of the connecting portion 52. The left side surface of the lower end portion 53 of the operation unit 5 extends downward substantially parallel to the upper end in the vertical direction, and then goes to the right side as it goes downward. The elastic member 4 partially contacts the left side surface of the lower end 53. The lower end 53 of the operation unit 5 projects to the right from the lower end of the connecting portion 52. As a result, an operation step portion 55 projecting to the right is formed at the lower end of the connecting portion 52 (that is, the upper end of the lower end portion 53).
 図24に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態では、操作部5の操作段差部55がケース2の一部に係止することにより、操作部5の上方への移動が制限される。操作部5の下端部53は、上述のように弾性部材4の可動部43に接触しており、弾性部材4の復元力により、操作段差部55がケース2の上記一部に押し付けられる。これにより、操作部5がケース2に係止されるため、操作部5が図24に示す位置よりも上側へと移動することが防止される。接続機器1dを組み立てる際には、操作部5は、撓んでいない状態(すなわち、非圧縮状態)の弾性部材4の可動部43が存在するはずの領域に先に配置されており、弾性部材4は、撓んだ状態でケース2に取り付けられる。これにより、上記構造が実現される。 In the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 24, the operation step portion 55 of the operation portion 5 is locked to a part of the case 2, so that the movement of the operation portion 5 upward is restricted. The lower end portion 53 of the operation portion 5 is in contact with the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 as described above, and the operation step portion 55 is pressed against the above-mentioned part of the case 2 by the restoring force of the elastic member 4. As a result, the operation unit 5 is locked to the case 2, so that the operation unit 5 is prevented from moving upward from the position shown in FIG. 24. When assembling the connecting device 1d, the operation unit 5 is first arranged in the region where the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the non-flexible state (that is, the uncompressed state) should exist, and the elastic member 4 Is attached to the case 2 in a bent state. As a result, the above structure is realized.
 図24に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態では、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域と略同一平面上に位置する。あるいは、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部(すなわち、当該領域よりも下側)に位置する。また、図25に示すように、操作部5の厚さ方向の両側面513は、ケース2の厚さ方向の両側面26のうち操作部5の周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。操作部5の他の表面についても同様である。換言すれば、図24に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態では、操作部5の表面は、ケース2の表面のうち操作部5の周囲の領域(すなわち、移動経路24の周囲の領域)よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。 In the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 24, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. Alternatively, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is located inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 with respect to the area around the operation unit 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the side surfaces 513 of the operation unit 5 in the thickness direction are located inside the case 2 of the side surfaces 26 in the thickness direction of the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5. , Or, it is located on substantially the same plane as the area. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5. In other words, in the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 24, the surface of the operation unit 5 is the surface of the case 2 in the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
 図27は、図24中のXXVII-XXVIIの位置にて接続機器1dを切断した断面図である。図24および図27に示すように、ケース2は、操作部5の下方に位置する一対の押圧部23を備える。一対の押圧部23は、挿入穴閉鎖状態における弾性部材4の可動部43から下方に離間した位置に配置される。図27に示す例では、一対の押圧部23は、ケース2の厚さ方向の両側面26の一部を、上端235を除いて周囲の部位から切り離し、下端236が互いに近づくように厚さ方向内側に曲げた部位である。 FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the connecting device 1d cut at the position of XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 24. As shown in FIGS. 24 and 27, the case 2 includes a pair of pressing portions 23 located below the operating portion 5. The pair of pressing portions 23 are arranged at positions separated downward from the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the state where the insertion hole is closed. In the example shown in FIG. 27, the pair of pressing portions 23 separate a part of both side surfaces 26 in the thickness direction of the case 2 from the surrounding portions except for the upper end 235, and the lower end 236 is closer to each other in the thickness direction. This is the part bent inward.
 一対の押圧部23は、厚さ方向(すなわち、可動部43の可動領域に垂直な方向)に互いに離間して配置される。各押圧部23は、左右方向の幅よりも厚さ方向の厚さが小さい帯状の部材であり、上下方向に略平行に延びる。一対の押圧部23の厚さ方向の間隔(以下、単に「一対の押圧部23の間隔」とも呼ぶ。)は、下方に向かうに従って漸次小さくなる。一対の押圧部23の間隔は、押圧部23の上端235において、厚さ方向における弾性部材4の幅よりも大きい。また、一対の押圧部23の間隔は、押圧部23の下端236において、厚さ方向における弾性部材4の幅よりも小さい。各押圧部23は、厚さ方向に弾性変形可能な樹脂バネである。 The pair of pressing portions 23 are arranged apart from each other in the thickness direction (that is, the direction perpendicular to the movable region of the movable portion 43). Each pressing portion 23 is a strip-shaped member whose thickness in the thickness direction is smaller than the width in the left-right direction, and extends substantially parallel to the vertical direction. The spacing in the thickness direction of the pair of pressing portions 23 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “the spacing of the pair of pressing portions 23”) gradually decreases toward the bottom. The distance between the pair of pressing portions 23 is larger than the width of the elastic member 4 in the thickness direction at the upper end 235 of the pressing portions 23. Further, the distance between the pair of pressing portions 23 is smaller than the width of the elastic member 4 in the thickness direction at the lower end 236 of the pressing portions 23. Each pressing portion 23 is a resin spring that can be elastically deformed in the thickness direction.
 次に、接続機器1dに対する電線の接続の流れについて、図24、図27ないし図31を参照しつつ説明する。なお、以下では、図中の右側の挿入穴21に電線を接続する際の様子について説明する。図中の左側の挿入穴21に電線を接続する場合については、左右反対向きである点を除き、作業員の動作は略同様である。 Next, the flow of connecting the electric wire to the connecting device 1d will be described with reference to FIGS. 24, 27 to 31. In the following, a state when the electric wire is connected to the insertion hole 21 on the right side in the drawing will be described. When the electric wire is connected to the insertion hole 21 on the left side in the drawing, the operation of the worker is substantially the same except that the directions are opposite to each other.
 まず、図24に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態から操作部5がケース2の内部に向かって押し込まれ、移動経路24に沿って下方へと移動する。操作部5が押し込まれる際には、例えば、作業員が通常のマイナスドライバー等の先端を、操作部5の上端部51の操作凹部に接触させ、当該マイナスドライバーを介して操作部5に下向きの力を加える。操作部5の下方への移動に従って、弾性部材4は撓んで弾性部材4の形状が変更される。具体的には、図28に示すように、弾性部材4の可動部43が、操作部5の下端部53により下方へと押し下げられ、端子部3から左側へと離間する。これにより、挿入穴21の下端部が開放される。以下の説明では、図28に示す接続機器1dの状態を「挿入穴開放状態」という。 First, the operation unit 5 is pushed toward the inside of the case 2 from the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 24, and moves downward along the movement path 24. When the operation unit 5 is pushed in, for example, a worker brings the tip of a normal flat-blade screwdriver or the like into contact with the operation recess of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5, and points downward to the operation unit 5 via the flat-blade screwdriver. Apply force. As the operation unit 5 moves downward, the elastic member 4 bends and the shape of the elastic member 4 is changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the lower end portion 53 of the operating portion 5, and is separated from the terminal portion 3 to the left side. As a result, the lower end of the insertion hole 21 is opened. In the following description, the state of the connected device 1d shown in FIG. 28 is referred to as an “insertion hole open state”.
 図24に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態から図28に示す挿入穴開放状態への移行時には、弾性部材4の可動部43が、図27に示す位置から操作部5により下方へと押し込まれて湾曲し、一対の押圧部23(図27参照)の上端235の間を通過する。弾性部材4の可動部43が一対の押圧部23の上端235の間に位置する状態では、可動部43は、一対の押圧部23とは接触しない。可動部43は、一対の押圧部23の間を下降し、一対の押圧部23の間隔が厚さ方向における可動部43の幅と略同じになる位置で、一対の押圧部23に接触する。一対の押圧部23は、略帯状の可動部43の幅方向から、厚さ方向における可動部43の両側面に接触する。そして、可動部43がさらに下降して挿入穴開放状態となることにより、図28および図29に示すように、可動部43が、厚さ方向における一対の押圧部23の間に挟持される。このとき、一対の押圧部23は、厚さ方向において互いに離れる方向に弾性変形している。また、可動部43と一対の押圧部23との間には、弾性部材4の復元力(すなわち、可動部43を上向きに移動させようとする力)に抗する摩擦抵抗が生じている。 At the time of transition from the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 24 to the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. 28, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the operating portion 5 from the position shown in FIG. 27 and curved. It passes between the upper ends 235 of the pair of pressing portions 23 (see FIG. 27). When the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is located between the upper ends 235 of the pair of pressing portions 23, the movable portion 43 does not come into contact with the pair of pressing portions 23. The movable portion 43 descends between the pair of pressing portions 23, and comes into contact with the pair of pressing portions 23 at a position where the distance between the pair of pressing portions 23 is substantially the same as the width of the movable portion 43 in the thickness direction. The pair of pressing portions 23 come into contact with both side surfaces of the movable portion 43 in the thickness direction from the width direction of the substantially band-shaped movable portion 43. Then, the movable portion 43 is further lowered to open the insertion hole, so that the movable portion 43 is sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions 23 in the thickness direction, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29. At this time, the pair of pressing portions 23 are elastically deformed in the direction in which they are separated from each other in the thickness direction. Further, a frictional resistance is generated between the movable portion 43 and the pair of pressing portions 23 against the restoring force of the elastic member 4 (that is, the force for moving the movable portion 43 upward).
 挿入穴開放状態の接続機器1dでは、上記摩擦抵抗が生じることにより、弾性部材4の復元力が、ケース2の一対の押圧部23により部分的に支持される。したがって、操作部5を下向きに押し込んだ状態で維持するために必要な作業員の力が軽減される。すなわち、接続機器1dでは、弾性部材4の可動部43および一対の押圧部23により、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力を低減させる保持力低減機構60dが構成される。なお、一対の押圧部23により支持される弾性部材4の復元力は、弾性部材4の全復元力よりも小さい。換言すれば、挿入穴開放状態の弾性部材4の復元力は、可動部43と一対の押圧部23との間に生じる摩擦抵抗よりも大きい。したがって、当該摩擦抵抗のみにより、弾性部材4の可動部43が一対の押圧部23に係止されることはない。 In the connecting device 1d with the insertion hole open, the restoring force of the elastic member 4 is partially supported by the pair of pressing portions 23 of the case 2 due to the frictional resistance generated. Therefore, the force of the worker required to maintain the operation unit 5 in the downwardly pushed state is reduced. That is, in the connecting device 1d, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 and the pair of pressing portions 23 constitute a holding force reducing mechanism 60d that reduces the force for maintaining the operating portion 5 in the case 2 in a pushed state. The restoring force of the elastic member 4 supported by the pair of pressing portions 23 is smaller than the total restoring force of the elastic member 4. In other words, the restoring force of the elastic member 4 in the open insertion hole state is larger than the frictional resistance generated between the movable portion 43 and the pair of pressing portions 23. Therefore, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is not locked to the pair of pressing portions 23 only by the frictional resistance.
 接続機器1dでは、一対の押圧部23による可動部43の挟持により、操作部5を押し込むマイナスドライバーを握る作業員の手に抵抗が生じる。したがって、作業員は、挿入穴閉鎖状態から挿入穴開放状態への移行完了を容易に認識することができる。 In the connected device 1d, the pinching of the movable portion 43 by the pair of pressing portions 23 causes resistance to the hand of the worker holding the flat-blade screwdriver that pushes the operation portion 5. Therefore, the worker can easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state.
 また、接続機器1dでは、可動部43の上述の挟持と略同時に、操作部5の上端部51の下端が、ケース2の移動経路24内に設けられた上下方向に略垂直な停止面242に上側から接触する。これにより、操作部5の下方への過剰な移動を制限することができる。また、操作部5の上端部51と停止面242との接触による手応えおよび/または音の発生により、作業員は、挿入穴閉鎖状態から挿入穴開放状態への移行完了をさらに容易に認識することもできる。 Further, in the connected device 1d, substantially at the same time as the above-mentioned pinching of the movable portion 43, the lower end of the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5 is provided on the stop surface 242 provided in the movement path 24 of the case 2 and substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction. Contact from above. Thereby, it is possible to limit the excessive movement of the operation unit 5 downward. Further, the operator can more easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state by the response and / or the generation of sound due to the contact between the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 and the stop surface 242. You can also.
 図28に示す挿入穴開放状態では、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部(すなわち、当該領域よりも下側)に位置する。あるいは、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域と略同一平面上に位置していてもよい。操作部5の他の表面についても同様である。換言すれば、図28に示す挿入穴開放状態では、操作部5の表面は、ケース2の表面のうち操作部5の周囲の領域(すなわち、移動経路24の周囲の領域)よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。 In the state where the insertion hole is open as shown in FIG. 28, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 than the area around the operation unit 5. Located on the side). Alternatively, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 may be located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5. In other words, in the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. 28, the surface of the operation unit 5 is the surface of the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
 図28に示す挿入穴開放状態では、弾性部材4は、後述する結線状態の弾性部材4よりも撓んでおり、電線を端子部3との間で挟持しない。換言すれば、図28に示す接続機器1dの状態である挿入穴開放状態は、弾性部材4と端子部3との間の電線の挟持が解除された「非結線状態」である。 In the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. 28, the elastic member 4 is more bent than the elastic member 4 in the connection state described later, and does not sandwich the electric wire with the terminal portion 3. In other words, the insertion hole open state, which is the state of the connecting device 1d shown in FIG. 28, is a “non-connection state” in which the pinching of the electric wire between the elastic member 4 and the terminal portion 3 is released.
 続いて、弾性部材4が挿入穴開放状態にて維持された状態で、電線91が、図28中に二点鎖線にて示すように接続機器1dの挿入穴21に挿入される。電線91は、例えば単線であってもよく、より線であってもよい。また、電線91は、先端部に棒状圧着端子等が設けられたより線であってもよい。電線91の先端部の直径は、例えば、0.42mm以上であることが好ましい。電線91の先端部の直径は、現実的には、2.3mm以下である。電線91の先端部の直径は、様々に変更されてよい。また、電線91の先端部以外の部位の直径も、様々に変更されてよい。 Subsequently, with the elastic member 4 maintained in the insertion hole open state, the electric wire 91 is inserted into the insertion hole 21 of the connecting device 1d as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 28. The electric wire 91 may be, for example, a single wire or a stranded wire. Further, the electric wire 91 may be a stranded wire provided with a rod-shaped crimp terminal or the like at the tip end portion. The diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is preferably 0.42 mm or more, for example. The diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is practically 2.3 mm or less. The diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways. Further, the diameter of the portion other than the tip end portion of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways.
 電線91は、挿入穴21内にて下方へと移動され、図30に示すように、端子部3と挿入穴開放状態の弾性部材4との間に挿入される。その後、操作部5を押し込む作業員の力が弱められ、弾性部材4の復元力が、作業員の力と上記摩擦抵抗(すなわち、可動部43と一対の押圧部23との間に生じる摩擦抵抗)との合計よりも大きくなることにより、弾性部材4の可動部43が右斜め上方へと移動し、一対の押圧部23による可動部43の挟持が解除される。換言すれば、可動部43は、一対の押圧部23から離間して非接触の状態となる。 The electric wire 91 is moved downward in the insertion hole 21 and is inserted between the terminal portion 3 and the elastic member 4 in the insertion hole open state as shown in FIG. After that, the force of the worker pushing the operation unit 5 is weakened, and the restoring force of the elastic member 4 is the frictional resistance generated between the force of the worker and the frictional resistance (that is, between the movable part 43 and the pair of pressing parts 23). ), The movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 moves diagonally upward to the right, and the pair of pressing portions 23 is released from sandwiching the movable portion 43. In other words, the movable portion 43 is separated from the pair of pressing portions 23 and is in a non-contact state.
 また、可動部43は、図31に示すように、電線91に左側から接触する。弾性部材4の可動部43は、上記復元力により、電線91を端子部3に押し付けて端子部3との間で挟持する。これにより、電線91と端子部3とが電気的かつ機械的に接続される。換言すれば、電線91が接続機器1dに結線される。以下の説明では、図31に示す状態を「結線状態」という。結線状態の弾性部材4は、上述のように、電線91を端子部3との間で挟持している。また、結線状態の弾性部材4では、可動部43は、一対の押圧部23から上方に離間した位置に位置し、一対の押圧部23とは非接触である。 Further, as shown in FIG. 31, the movable portion 43 contacts the electric wire 91 from the left side. The movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3. As a result, the electric wire 91 and the terminal portion 3 are electrically and mechanically connected. In other words, the electric wire 91 is connected to the connecting device 1d. In the following description, the state shown in FIG. 31 is referred to as a “connection state”. As described above, the elastic member 4 in the connected state sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3. Further, in the elastic member 4 in the connected state, the movable portion 43 is located at a position separated upward from the pair of pressing portions 23, and is not in contact with the pair of pressing portions 23.
 接続機器1dでは、また、弾性部材4の可動部43の上記右斜め上方への移動により、操作部5は、図30に示す挿入穴開放状態から上方に移動し、下端部53が弾性部材4の可動部43に接触した状態で停止する。 In the connected device 1d, the operating portion 5 moves upward from the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. 30 due to the movement of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 diagonally upward to the right, and the lower end portion 53 is the elastic member 4. Stops in contact with the movable portion 43 of.
 図31に示す結線状態では、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部(すなわち、当該領域よりも下側)に位置する。あるいは、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域と略同一平面上に位置していてもよい。操作部5の他の表面についても同様である。換言すれば、図31に示す結線状態では、操作部5の表面は、ケース2の表面のうち操作部5の周囲の領域(すなわち、移動経路24の周囲の領域)よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。 In the wiring state shown in FIG. 31, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 with respect to the area around the operation unit 5. Located in. Alternatively, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 may be located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5. In other words, in the wiring state shown in FIG. 31, the surface of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24) in the surface of the case 2. It is located or is located substantially in the same plane as the area.
 なお、図31に示す結線状態において、図31中の上側が重力方向下側となるように接続機器1dが配置されている場合、操作部5は、重力により弾性部材4から図中の上方に離間する。そして、操作部5の操作段差部55が、図24に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態と同様に、ケース2の一部に係止され、操作部5の上方への移動が制限される。したがって、操作部5が図24に示す位置よりも上側へと移動することが防止される。 In the connection state shown in FIG. 31, when the connecting device 1d is arranged so that the upper side in FIG. 31 is the lower side in the direction of gravity, the operation unit 5 is moved upward in the drawing from the elastic member 4 due to gravity. Separate. Then, the operation step portion 55 of the operation portion 5 is locked to a part of the case 2 as in the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 24, and the upward movement of the operation portion 5 is restricted. Therefore, it is prevented that the operation unit 5 moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 24.
 電線91を接続機器1dから取り外す際には、例えば、作業員が通常のマイナスドライバー等の先端を、操作部5の上端部51の操作凹部に接触させ、当該マイナスドライバーを介して操作部5に下向きの力を加える。そして、操作部5を下方に移動し、図30に示すように挿入穴開放状態とする。挿入穴開放状態では、上述のように、弾性部材4は撓んで可動部43が電線91から左側へと離間する。換言すれば、弾性部材4および端子部3による電線91の挟持が解除される。また、弾性部材4の可動部43は、一対の押圧部23の間に挟持され、弾性部材4の復元力の一部が一対の押圧部23により支持される。 When removing the electric wire 91 from the connecting device 1d, for example, a worker brings the tip of a normal flat-blade screwdriver or the like into contact with the operation recess of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5, and brings the wire 91 to the operation unit 5 via the flat-blade screwdriver. Apply a downward force. Then, the operation unit 5 is moved downward to open the insertion hole as shown in FIG. In the state where the insertion hole is open, as described above, the elastic member 4 bends and the movable portion 43 is separated from the electric wire 91 to the left side. In other words, the sandwiching of the electric wire 91 by the elastic member 4 and the terminal portion 3 is released. Further, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions 23, and a part of the restoring force of the elastic member 4 is supported by the pair of pressing portions 23.
 このときも、上記と同様に、可動部43の挟持に起因する手応えが生じるため、作業員は、接続機器1dが挿入穴開放状態(すなわち、非結線状態)となったことを容易に認識することができる。また、操作部5の上端部51と停止面242との接触による手応えおよび/または音の発生により、接続機器1dが挿入穴開放状態(すなわち、非結線状態)となったことをさらに容易に認識することができる。 At this time as well, since the response caused by the pinching of the movable portion 43 occurs as described above, the worker can easily recognize that the connected device 1d is in the insertion hole open state (that is, the unconnected state). be able to. Further, it is more easily recognized that the connected device 1d is in the insertion hole open state (that is, the unconnected state) due to the response and / or the generation of sound due to the contact between the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 and the stop surface 242. can do.
 接続機器1dでは、弾性部材4は、図24に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態と、図28および図30に示す挿入穴開放状態と、図31に示す結線状態との間で変形可能である。以下の説明では、図31に示すように、結線状態の弾性部材4に接触する操作部5の位置を「第1位置」と呼ぶ。また、図28および図30に示すように、挿入穴開放状態(すなわち、非結線状態)の弾性部材4に接触する操作部5の位置を「第2位置」と呼ぶ。さらに、図24に示すように、操作段差部55がケース2の一部に係止する操作部5の位置を「第3位置」と呼ぶ。 In the connecting device 1d, the elastic member 4 can be deformed between the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 24, the insertion hole open state shown in FIGS. 28 and 30, and the wiring state shown in FIG. 31. In the following description, as shown in FIG. 31, the position of the operating portion 5 in contact with the elastic member 4 in the connected state is referred to as a “first position”. Further, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 30, the position of the operation unit 5 in contact with the elastic member 4 in the insertion hole open state (that is, the non-connection state) is referred to as a “second position”. Further, as shown in FIG. 24, the position of the operation portion 5 in which the operation step portion 55 is locked to a part of the case 2 is referred to as a “third position”.
 上述の移動経路24は、操作部5の第3位置、第1位置および第2位置をこの順に結ぶ。第3位置は、移動経路24において、第1位置を挟んで第2位置とは反対側に位置する。第2位置では、上述のように、弾性部材4の可動部43は一対の押圧部23により挟持される。第3位置では、操作段差部55がケース2の一部に係止することにより、操作部5の上方への移動(すなわち、第2位置から離れる方向への移動)が制限される。なお、第3位置では、操作部5の一部がケース2の一部に係止していればよく、必ずしも操作段差部55がケース2の一部に係止する必要はない。 The above-mentioned movement path 24 connects the third position, the first position, and the second position of the operation unit 5 in this order. The third position is located on the movement path 24 on the opposite side of the first position from the second position. At the second position, as described above, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is sandwiched by the pair of pressing portions 23. At the third position, the operation step portion 55 is locked to a part of the case 2, so that the upward movement of the operation portion 5 (that is, the movement in the direction away from the second position) is restricted. At the third position, it is sufficient that a part of the operation unit 5 is locked to a part of the case 2, and the operation step portion 55 does not necessarily have to be locked to a part of the case 2.
 以上に説明したように、電線91が接続される接続機器1dは、ケース2と、端子部3と、弾性部材4と、操作部5とを備える。端子部3は、導電性であり、ケース2に固定される。弾性部材4は、ケース2に取り付けられる。弾性部材4は、復元力により電線91を端子部3に押し付けて挟持する。操作部5は、ケース2に設けられた上下方向に延びる移動経路24に沿って移動することにより、弾性部材4の形状を変更する。弾性部材4は、電線91を端子部3との間で挟持している結線状態と、結線状態よりも撓んで端子部3との間の電線91の挟持が解除された非結線状態(すなわち、挿入穴開放状態)との間で変形可能である。操作部5は、第1位置において結線状態の弾性部材4に接触する。操作部5は、弾性部材4との接触状態を維持しつつ、第1位置よりも下側の第2位置へと押し込まれることにより、弾性部材4を非結線状態へと変形させる。接続機器1dは、操作部5が第2位置に位置する状態において、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力を低減させる保持力低減機構60dをさらに備える。これにより、接続機器1dを非結線状態で維持する力を低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1dの操作性を向上することができる。 As described above, the connecting device 1d to which the electric wire 91 is connected includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5. The terminal portion 3 is conductive and is fixed to the case 2. The elastic member 4 is attached to the case 2. The elastic member 4 presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91. The operation unit 5 changes the shape of the elastic member 4 by moving along a movement path 24 extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2. The elastic member 4 is in a connected state in which the electric wire 91 is sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 and a non-connected state in which the electric wire 91 is released from being sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 by being bent more than the connected state (that is,). It can be deformed with the insertion hole open state). The operation unit 5 comes into contact with the elastic member 4 in the connected state at the first position. The operating unit 5 deforms the elastic member 4 into a non-wired state by being pushed into the second position below the first position while maintaining the contact state with the elastic member 4. The connected device 1d further includes a holding force reducing mechanism 60d that reduces the force for maintaining the operating unit 5 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 when the operating unit 5 is located at the second position. As a result, the force for maintaining the connected device 1d in the unconnected state can be reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1d can be improved.
 上述のように、好ましくは、弾性部材4は、ケース2に固定される固定部42と、固定部42から斜め下方に延びる可動部43とを備える。結線状態では、操作部5が可動部43に接触し、可動部43が電線91を端子部3との間で挟持する。非結線状態では、可動部43が結線状態よりも下方に撓む。これにより、接続機器1dの操作性をさらに向上することができる。 As described above, preferably, the elastic member 4 includes a fixed portion 42 fixed to the case 2 and a movable portion 43 extending diagonally downward from the fixed portion 42. In the connected state, the operation unit 5 comes into contact with the movable portion 43, and the movable portion 43 sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3. In the non-connected state, the movable portion 43 bends downward from the connected state. Thereby, the operability of the connected device 1d can be further improved.
 上述のように、好ましくは、ケース2は、一対の押圧部23を備える。一対の押圧部23は、結線状態の弾性部材4の可動部43の下方において、可動部43の可動領域に垂直な厚さ方向に離間して配置されて上下方向に延びる。一対の押圧部23の厚さ方向の間隔は、下方に向かうに従って小さくなる。保持力低減機構60dは、弾性部材4の可動部43および一対の押圧部23を備える。操作部5が第2位置に位置する状態では、可動部43が一対の押圧部23の間に挟持され、可動部43と一対の押圧部23との間に、弾性部材4の復元力に抗する摩擦抵抗が生じる。これにより、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力を、簡素な構造によって低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1dの操作性を容易に向上することができる。 As described above, preferably, the case 2 includes a pair of pressing portions 23. The pair of pressing portions 23 are arranged below the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the connected state, separated in the thickness direction perpendicular to the movable region of the movable portion 43, and extend in the vertical direction. The distance between the pair of pressing portions 23 in the thickness direction becomes smaller toward the bottom. The holding force reducing mechanism 60d includes a movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 and a pair of pressing portions 23. In the state where the operating portion 5 is located at the second position, the movable portion 43 is sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions 23, and resists the restoring force of the elastic member 4 between the movable portion 43 and the pair of pressing portions 23. Friction resistance occurs. As a result, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state) can be reduced by a simple structure. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1d can be easily improved.
 上述のように、非結線状態の弾性部材4の復元力は、好ましくは上述の摩擦抵抗よりも大きい。このため、非結線状態の接続機器1dに電線91を結線する際に、マイナスドライバー等により操作部5を下向きに押す力を緩めることにより、操作部5を第2位置から第1位置へと容易に移動させ、弾性部材4の可動部43と端子部3との間に電線91を容易に挟持させることができる。また、接続機器1dから電線91を抜き取った後、弾性部材4を非結線状態(すなわち、挿入穴開放状態)から挿入穴閉鎖状態へと戻す際にも同様に、マイナスドライバー等により操作部5を下向きに押す力を緩めることにより、操作部5を第2位置から第3位置へと容易に移動させることができる。したがって、電線91の結線の際、あるいは、電線91の結線解除の際に、マイナスドライバー等を移動経路24に繰り返し挿入する必要がないため、接続機器1dの操作性を向上することができる。 As described above, the restoring force of the elastic member 4 in the unconnected state is preferably larger than the frictional resistance described above. Therefore, when connecting the electric wire 91 to the connected device 1d in the unconnected state, the operation unit 5 can be easily moved from the second position to the first position by relaxing the force for pushing the operation unit 5 downward with a flat-blade screwdriver or the like. The electric wire 91 can be easily sandwiched between the movable portion 43 and the terminal portion 3 of the elastic member 4. Further, when the elastic member 4 is returned from the unconnected state (that is, the insertion hole open state) to the insertion hole closed state after the electric wire 91 is pulled out from the connected device 1d, the operation unit 5 is similarly moved by a flat-blade screwdriver or the like. By loosening the downward pushing force, the operation unit 5 can be easily moved from the second position to the third position. Therefore, it is not necessary to repeatedly insert a flat-blade screwdriver or the like into the movement path 24 when connecting the electric wire 91 or disconnecting the electric wire 91, so that the operability of the connected device 1d can be improved.
 上述のように、弾性部材4は板バネであることが好ましい。これにより、接続機器1dの構造を簡素化することができる。その結果、接続機器1dの製造を容易とすることができる。 As described above, the elastic member 4 is preferably a leaf spring. Thereby, the structure of the connected device 1d can be simplified. As a result, the manufacturing of the connected device 1d can be facilitated.
 接続機器1dでは、図32に示すように、厚さ方向における弾性部材4の可動部43の両側面に凸部44が設けられ、一対の押圧部23の厚さ方向の内側面(すなわち、可動部43と接触する面)に凹部231が設けられてもよい。各凹部231は、操作部5が上述の第2位置に位置する状態で、凸部44と嵌合する。これにより、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。 In the connected device 1d, as shown in FIG. 32, convex portions 44 are provided on both side surfaces of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the thickness direction, and the inner side surfaces (that is, movable) of the pair of pressing portions 23 in the thickness direction. A recess 231 may be provided on the surface in contact with the portion 43). Each concave portion 231 fits with the convex portion 44 in a state where the operating portion 5 is located at the above-mentioned second position. As a result, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5 in the case 2 in the pushed state can be further reduced.
 また、接続機器1dでは、弾性部材4の可動部43に凹部が設けられ、一対の押圧部23に凸部が設けられてもよい。換言すれば、接続機器1dでは、可動部43および一対の押圧部23のうち一方が凸部を有し、可動部43および一対の押圧部23のうち他方が、操作部5が第2位置に位置する状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で当該凸部と嵌合する凹部を有することが好ましい。これにより、上述のように、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1dの操作性をさらに向上することができる。なお、この場合であっても、操作部5を押し込む力を緩めると、弾性部材4の復元力により、操作部5は上方へと移動し、可動部43は右上方へと移動する。 Further, in the connecting device 1d, a concave portion may be provided in the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4, and a convex portion may be provided in the pair of pressing portions 23. In other words, in the connected device 1d, one of the movable portion 43 and the pair of pressing portions 23 has a convex portion, and the other of the movable portion 43 and the pair of pressing portions 23 has the operating portion 5 in the second position. It is preferable to have a concave portion that fits with the convex portion in a positioned state (that is, a non-connected state). As a result, as described above, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state) can be further reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1d can be further improved. Even in this case, when the force for pushing the operating portion 5 is relaxed, the operating portion 5 moves upward and the movable portion 43 moves upward to the right due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4.
 接続機器1dでは、図33に太線にて示すように、厚さ方向における弾性部材4の可動部43の両側面に粗面部45が設けられ、一対の押圧部23の厚さ方向の内側面(すなわち、可動部43と接触する面)に粗面部232が設けられてもよい。粗面部45および粗面部232はそれぞれ、周囲の部位よりも表面粗度が大きい領域である。粗面部45と粗面部232とが接触することにより、可動部43と一対の押圧部23との間の摩擦抵抗が増大するため、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。 In the connected device 1d, as shown by a thick line in FIG. 33, rough surface portions 45 are provided on both side surfaces of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the thickness direction, and the inner surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 23 in the thickness direction ( That is, the rough surface portion 232 may be provided on the surface in contact with the movable portion 43). The rough surface portion 45 and the rough surface portion 232 are regions having a surface roughness larger than that of the surrounding portions, respectively. When the rough surface portion 45 and the rough surface portion 232 come into contact with each other, the frictional resistance between the movable portion 43 and the pair of pressing portions 23 increases, so that the force for maintaining the operating portion 5 in the case 2 in a pushed state is increased. It can be further reduced.
 接続機器1dでは、厚さ方向における可動部43の両側面、および、一対の押圧部23の内側面のうち、少なくとも一の面が粗面部を有していればよい。この場合であっても、可動部43と一対の押圧部23との間の摩擦抵抗が増大するため、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1dの操作性をさらに向上することができる。なお、当該摩擦抵抗が増大した状態であっても、操作部5を押し込む力を緩めると、弾性部材4の復元力により、操作部5は上方へと移動し、可動部43は右上方へと移動する。 In the connected device 1d, it is sufficient that at least one of the side surfaces of the movable portion 43 in the thickness direction and the inner surfaces of the pair of pressing portions 23 has rough surface portions. Even in this case, since the frictional resistance between the movable portion 43 and the pair of pressing portions 23 increases, the force for maintaining the operating portion 5 in the case 2 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state) is applied. It can be further reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1d can be further improved. Even when the frictional resistance is increased, if the force for pushing the operating portion 5 is relaxed, the operating portion 5 moves upward due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4, and the movable portion 43 moves upward to the right. Moving.
 図34は、本発明の第5の実施の形態に係る接続機器1eの斜視図である。図35は、接続機器1eの断面図である。図36は、接続機器1eを図35中のXXXVI-XXXVIの位置にて切断した断面図である。図37は、接続機器1eの分解斜視図である。接続機器1eは、電線91が接続されるプッシュイン式の接続機器である。接続機器1eは、例えば、制御盤等の端子台に利用される。図34では、接続機器1eの手前側に薄板状のエンドプレート11が取り付けられている。また、図34では、複数の接続機器1eが連結された状態を二点鎖線にて示す。図35ないし図37では、電線91が接続機器1eに挿入されていない状態を示す。図35では、断面よりも奥側の構成についても併せて図示している。以下の説明では、接続機器1eの構成のうち、図1ないし図4に示す接続機器1の構成に対応するものに同符号を付す。 FIG. 34 is a perspective view of the connecting device 1e according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the connected device 1e. FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view of the connected device 1e cut at the position of XXXVI-XXXVI in FIG. 35. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the connected device 1e. The connecting device 1e is a push-in type connecting device to which the electric wire 91 is connected. The connected device 1e is used, for example, as a terminal block of a control panel or the like. In FIG. 34, a thin plate-shaped end plate 11 is attached to the front side of the connecting device 1e. Further, in FIG. 34, a state in which a plurality of connected devices 1e are connected is shown by a two-dot chain line. 35 to 37 show a state in which the electric wire 91 is not inserted into the connecting device 1e. In FIG. 35, the configuration on the back side of the cross section is also shown. In the following description, among the configurations of the connected devices 1e, those corresponding to the configurations of the connected devices 1 shown in FIGS. 1 to 4 are designated by the same reference numerals.
 以下の説明では、図35中の上下方向および左右方向を、単に「上下方向」および「左右方向」とも呼ぶ。また、図35において紙面に垂直な方向を「厚さ方向」とも呼ぶ。図35は、接続機器1eの厚さ方向の略中央における断面を示す。当該上下方向、左右方向および厚さ方向は、接続機器1eが使用される際の取付方向とは必ずしも一致する必要はない。また、当該上下方向は、重力方向とも必ずしも一致する必要はない。 In the following description, the vertical direction and the horizontal direction in FIG. 35 are also simply referred to as "vertical direction" and "horizontal direction". Further, in FIG. 35, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface is also referred to as a "thickness direction". FIG. 35 shows a cross section of the connected device 1e at substantially the center in the thickness direction. The vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the thickness direction do not necessarily have to coincide with the mounting direction when the connected device 1e is used. Further, the vertical direction does not necessarily have to coincide with the direction of gravity.
 接続機器1eは、ケース2と、端子部3と、弾性部材4と、操作部5とを備える。ケース2は、端子部3、弾性部材4および操作部5を内部に収容する。ケース2は、例えば樹脂製である。図35に示す例では、ケース2には、それぞれに電線が挿入可能な2つの挿入穴21が設けられる。また、ケース2の内部には、2つの端子部3と、2つの弾性部材4と、2つの操作部5とが収容されている。換言すれば、接続機器1eは、2セットの端子部3、弾性部材4および操作部5を備える。なお、接続機器1eは、1セットまたは3セット以上の端子部3、弾性部材4および操作部5を備えていてもよい。 The connecting device 1e includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5. The case 2 houses the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 inside. The case 2 is made of resin, for example. In the example shown in FIG. 35, the case 2 is provided with two insertion holes 21 into which electric wires can be inserted. Further, inside the case 2, two terminal portions 3, two elastic members 4, and two operating portions 5 are housed. In other words, the connecting device 1e includes two sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5. The connecting device 1e may include one set or three or more sets of terminal portions 3, an elastic member 4, and an operation portion 5.
 端子部3、弾性部材4および操作部5の各セットは、挿入穴21に対応して配置される。2セットの端子部3、弾性部材4および操作部5は、形状および大きさ等は互いに同じであり、左右反対向きに配置される。図35中の右側の挿入穴21に注目すると、端子部3は、挿入穴21の下端部の右側に位置し、挿入穴21の下端部から下方に延びる。弾性部材4は、挿入穴21の下端部から左側へと延び、さらに下方へと延びる。操作部5は、挿入穴21の左側において、弾性部材4の上側に配置される。 Each set of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 is arranged corresponding to the insertion hole 21. The two sets of the terminal portion 3, the elastic member 4, and the operation portion 5 have the same shape and size, and are arranged in opposite directions. Focusing on the insertion hole 21 on the right side in FIG. 35, the terminal portion 3 is located on the right side of the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21 and extends downward from the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21. The elastic member 4 extends from the lower end of the insertion hole 21 to the left side and further downward. The operation unit 5 is arranged on the left side of the insertion hole 21 and above the elastic member 4.
 端子部3は、ケース2に固定された導電性の部材である。端子部3は、例えば金属製である。図35中の右側の端子部3は、図35中の左側の端子部3と電気的に接続されている。図35ないし図37に示す例では、当該2つの端子部3は一繋がりの部材である。具体的には、2つの端子部3の下端部が、左右方向に延びる導電性の端子接続部32により接続されている。 The terminal portion 3 is a conductive member fixed to the case 2. The terminal portion 3 is made of metal, for example. The right terminal portion 3 in FIG. 35 is electrically connected to the left terminal portion 3 in FIG. 35. In the example shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the two terminal portions 3 are connected members. Specifically, the lower ends of the two terminal portions 3 are connected by a conductive terminal connecting portion 32 extending in the left-right direction.
 弾性部材4は、ケース2に取り付けられた弾性変形可能な部材である。図35ないし図37に示すように、弾性部材4は、略帯状の板バネである。弾性部材4は、例えば金属製である。弾性部材4は、導電材料により形成されてもよく、樹脂等の絶縁材料により形成されてもよい。弾性部材4は、例えば、長手方向の中央部41にて略L字状、略V字状または略U字状に折り曲げられた形状を有する。弾性部材4は、中央部41をケース2により挟まれることにより、両端部を略下側に向けた状態でケース2に取り付けられる。以下の説明では、ケース2のうち中央部41に下側から接する部位22を、「支持部22」と呼ぶ。支持部22は、弾性部材4の中央部41から略下方に延びる。 The elastic member 4 is an elastically deformable member attached to the case 2. As shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the elastic member 4 is a substantially strip-shaped leaf spring. The elastic member 4 is made of metal, for example. The elastic member 4 may be formed of a conductive material or an insulating material such as a resin. The elastic member 4 has, for example, a shape that is bent into a substantially L-shape, a substantially V-shape, or a substantially U-shape at the central portion 41 in the longitudinal direction. The elastic member 4 is attached to the case 2 with both ends facing substantially downward by sandwiching the central portion 41 between the cases 2. In the following description, the portion 22 of the case 2 that contacts the central portion 41 from below is referred to as a “support portion 22”. The support portion 22 extends substantially downward from the central portion 41 of the elastic member 4.
 図35中の右側の弾性部材4に注目すると、当該弾性部材4のうち、中央部41から支持部22の左側に延びる部位42は、支持部22とケース2の他の部位との間に挟まれることにより、ケース2に固定されている。また、当該弾性部材4のうち、中央部41から支持部22の右側に延びる部位43は、上下方向に延びる端子部3に接触している。弾性部材4の部位43は、操作部5により下方に押されることにより、支持部22の上端部を支点として弾性変形して下向きに撓む。また、当該部位43に対する下向きの押圧力がなくなると、部位43は復元力により元の状態に戻る(すなわち、弾性復帰する)。以下の説明では、弾性部材4の部位42および部位43をそれぞれ、「固定部42」および「可動部43」と呼ぶ。固定部42と可動部43とは、中央部41を通る中心線に対して略線対称である。可動部43は、固定部42の上端から斜め下方に延びる。 Focusing on the elastic member 4 on the right side in FIG. 35, the portion 42 of the elastic member 4 extending from the central portion 41 to the left side of the support portion 22 is sandwiched between the support portion 22 and another portion of the case 2. Therefore, it is fixed to the case 2. Further, among the elastic members 4, the portion 43 extending from the central portion 41 to the right side of the support portion 22 is in contact with the terminal portion 3 extending in the vertical direction. When the portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the operating portion 5, it elastically deforms with the upper end portion of the support portion 22 as a fulcrum and bends downward. Further, when the downward pressing force on the portion 43 disappears, the portion 43 returns to its original state (that is, elastically returns) due to the restoring force. In the following description, the portion 42 and the portion 43 of the elastic member 4 will be referred to as a "fixed portion 42" and a "movable portion 43", respectively. The fixed portion 42 and the movable portion 43 are substantially line-symmetrical with respect to the center line passing through the central portion 41. The movable portion 43 extends obliquely downward from the upper end of the fixed portion 42.
 図35に示す状態では、弾性部材4の可動部43の先端が、上述のように、挿入穴21よりも下側において端子部3に接触し、挿入穴21の下端部を下側から閉鎖している。以下の説明では、図35に示す状態を「挿入穴閉鎖状態」と呼ぶ。また、挿入穴閉鎖状態は、挿入穴21に電線が挿入される前の状態、すなわち、接続機器1eが使用される前の初期状態である。 In the state shown in FIG. 35, the tip of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 contacts the terminal portion 3 below the insertion hole 21 as described above, and the lower end portion of the insertion hole 21 is closed from below. ing. In the following description, the state shown in FIG. 35 is referred to as an “insertion hole closed state”. The insertion hole closed state is a state before the electric wire is inserted into the insertion hole 21, that is, an initial state before the connecting device 1e is used.
 挿入穴閉鎖状態(すなわち、初期状態)の弾性部材4は、固定部42と可動部43とが近づく向きに少し撓んでいる。これにより、弾性部材4がケース2から脱落することを防止することができる。なお、図35中の左側には、撓みの無い状態の弾性部材4を二点鎖線にて示す。 The elastic member 4 in the insertion hole closed state (that is, the initial state) is slightly bent in the direction in which the fixed portion 42 and the movable portion 43 approach each other. This makes it possible to prevent the elastic member 4 from falling off from the case 2. On the left side in FIG. 35, the elastic member 4 in a non-flexible state is shown by a chain double-dashed line.
 操作部5は、上下方向に延びる略柱状または略板状の部材である。操作部5は、ケース2に設けられた上下方向に延びる穴部(以下、「移動経路24」と呼ぶ。)の内部に位置する。操作部5は、移動経路24に沿って上下方向に移動可能である。移動経路24は、ケース2の上面25に開口し、当該上面25から略下方に延びる。 The operation unit 5 is a substantially columnar or substantially plate-shaped member extending in the vertical direction. The operation unit 5 is located inside a hole portion (hereinafter, referred to as “movement path 24”) extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2. The operation unit 5 can move in the vertical direction along the movement path 24. The movement path 24 opens to the upper surface 25 of the case 2 and extends substantially downward from the upper surface 25.
 操作部5は、上端部51と、連結部52と、下端部53とを備える。上端部51、連結部52および下端部53は、この順序で上側から下側に向かって繋がる一繋がりの部材である。操作部5は、例えば樹脂製である。操作部5の上端部51は、例えば略直方体状の部位である。上端部51の上面511は、上下方向に略垂直な平面である。上端部51の上面511の中央部には、下向きに凹む操作凹部が設けられる。連結部52は、上端部51の下端から下方に延び、上端部51と下端部53とを連結する。連結部52は、例えば、厚さ方向の幅が左右方向の幅よりも大きい略板状の部位である。下端部53は、連結部52の下端から下方に延びる。下端部53は、例えば、略板状または略柱状の部位である。 The operation unit 5 includes an upper end portion 51, a connecting portion 52, and a lower end portion 53. The upper end portion 51, the connecting portion 52, and the lower end portion 53 are one-connected members that are connected from the upper side to the lower side in this order. The operation unit 5 is made of resin, for example. The upper end portion 51 of the operation portion 5 is, for example, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped portion. The upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 is a plane substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction. An operation recess that is recessed downward is provided at the center of the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51. The connecting portion 52 extends downward from the lower end of the upper end portion 51, and connects the upper end portion 51 and the lower end portion 53. The connecting portion 52 is, for example, a substantially plate-shaped portion whose width in the thickness direction is larger than the width in the left-right direction. The lower end 53 extends downward from the lower end of the connecting 52. The lower end portion 53 is, for example, a substantially plate-shaped or substantially columnar portion.
 上端部51の左右方向の幅は、上端部51の上下方向の略全長に亘って略一定である。連結部52の左右方向の幅は、連結部52の上下方向の略全長に亘って略一定である。下端部53の左右方向の幅は、下端部53の上部において略一定であり、当該上部から下方に向かうに従って漸次減少する。上端部51の左右方向の幅は、連結部52の左右方向の幅よりも大きい。下端部53の上端の左右方向の幅は、連結部52の下端の左右方向の幅よりも大きい。連結部52の左右両側の側面は、左右方向に略垂直であり、上下方向に略平行に延びる。 The width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the upper end portion 51 in the vertical direction. The width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction is substantially constant over the substantially total length of the connecting portion 52 in the vertical direction. The width of the lower end portion 53 in the left-right direction is substantially constant at the upper portion of the lower end portion 53, and gradually decreases from the upper portion toward the lower side. The width of the upper end portion 51 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction. The width of the upper end of the lower end 53 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the lower end of the connecting portion 52 in the left-right direction. The left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion 52 are substantially perpendicular to the left and right directions, and extend substantially parallel to the vertical direction.
 図35中の右側の操作部5に注目すると、当該操作部5の上端部51は、連結部52の上端から左側に突出する。操作部5の下端部53の左側の側面は、上端から上下方向に略平行に下方へと延び、その後、下方に向かうに従って右側へと向かう。弾性部材4は、下端部53の左側の側面と部分的に接触する。操作部5の下端部53は、連結部52の下端から右側に突出する。これにより、連結部52の下端(すなわち、下端部53の上端)に、右側へと突出する操作段差部55が形成される。 Focusing on the operation unit 5 on the right side in FIG. 35, the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 projects to the left from the upper end of the connecting portion 52. The left side surface of the lower end portion 53 of the operation unit 5 extends downward substantially parallel to the upper end in the vertical direction, and then goes to the right side as it goes downward. The elastic member 4 partially contacts the left side surface of the lower end 53. The lower end 53 of the operation unit 5 projects to the right from the lower end of the connecting portion 52. As a result, an operation step portion 55 projecting to the right is formed at the lower end of the connecting portion 52 (that is, the upper end of the lower end portion 53).
 図35に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態では、操作部5の操作段差部55がケース2の一部に係止することにより、操作部5の上方への移動が制限される。操作部5の下端部53は、上述のように弾性部材4の可動部43に接触しており、弾性部材4の復元力により、操作段差部55がケース2の上記一部に押し付けられる。これにより、操作部5がケース2に係止されるため、操作部5が図35に示す位置よりも上側へと移動することが防止される。接続機器1eを組み立てる際には、操作部5は、撓んでいない状態(すなわち、非圧縮状態)の弾性部材4の可動部43が存在するはずの領域に先に配置されており、弾性部材4は、撓んだ状態でケース2に取り付けられる。これにより、上記構造が実現される。 In the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 35, the operation step portion 55 of the operation portion 5 is locked to a part of the case 2, so that the movement of the operation portion 5 upward is restricted. The lower end portion 53 of the operation portion 5 is in contact with the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 as described above, and the operation step portion 55 is pressed against the above-mentioned part of the case 2 by the restoring force of the elastic member 4. As a result, the operation unit 5 is locked to the case 2, so that the operation unit 5 is prevented from moving upward from the position shown in FIG. 35. When assembling the connecting device 1e, the operation unit 5 is first arranged in the region where the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the non-flexible state (that is, the uncompressed state) should exist, and the elastic member 4 Is attached to the case 2 in a bent state. As a result, the above structure is realized.
 図35に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態では、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域と略同一平面上に位置する。あるいは、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部(すなわち、当該領域よりも下側)に位置する。また、図36に示すように、操作部5の厚さ方向の両側面513は、ケース2の厚さ方向の両側面26のうち操作部5の周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。操作部5の他の表面についても同様である。換言すれば、図35に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態では、操作部5の表面は、ケース2の表面のうち操作部5の周囲の領域(すなわち、移動経路24の周囲の領域)よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。 In the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 35, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. Alternatively, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is located inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 with respect to the area around the operation unit 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 36, the side surfaces 513 of the operation unit 5 in the thickness direction are located inside the case 2 of the side surfaces 26 in the thickness direction of the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5. , Or, it is located on substantially the same plane as the area. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5. In other words, in the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 35, the surface of the operation unit 5 is the surface of the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
 ケース2は、操作部5の下方に位置する可動端係止部23eを備える。可動端係止部23eは、弾性部材4の可動部43の鉛直下方において、支持部22の下端部から端子部3に向かって略左右方向に延びる薄板状の部材である。可動端係止部23eの上下方向の厚さは、左右方向の長さに比べて小さい。可動端係止部23eは、上下方向に弾性変形可能な樹脂バネである。図35に示す状態では、可動端係止部23eは、弾性部材4の可動部43から下方に離間した位置に位置する。 The case 2 includes a movable end locking portion 23e located below the operating portion 5. The movable end locking portion 23e is a thin plate-shaped member extending substantially in the left-right direction from the lower end portion of the support portion 22 toward the terminal portion 3 vertically below the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4. The vertical thickness of the movable end locking portion 23e is smaller than the length in the horizontal direction. The movable end locking portion 23e is a resin spring that can be elastically deformed in the vertical direction. In the state shown in FIG. 35, the movable end locking portion 23e is located at a position separated downward from the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4.
 図35中の右側の可動端係止部23eに注目すると、可動端係止部23eの左端部は、支持部22の下端部に接続されている。可動端係止部23eの上面234は、支持部22の下端部から離れるに従って(すなわち、左右方向において端子部3に近づくに従って)上方へと向かう傾斜面である。可動端係止部23eの上面234は、上方に向かうに従って弾性部材4の可動部43の下端部に近づく方向へと斜め上方に延びる。以下の説明では、可動端係止部23eの上面234を、「傾斜接触面234」とも呼ぶ。 Focusing on the movable end locking portion 23e on the right side in FIG. 35, the left end portion of the movable end locking portion 23e is connected to the lower end portion of the support portion 22. The upper surface 234 of the movable end locking portion 23e is an inclined surface that moves upward as it moves away from the lower end portion of the support portion 22 (that is, as it approaches the terminal portion 3 in the left-right direction). The upper surface 234 of the movable end locking portion 23e extends diagonally upward in a direction approaching the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 as it goes upward. In the following description, the upper surface 234 of the movable end locking portion 23e is also referred to as an “inclined contact surface 234”.
 次に、接続機器1eに対する電線の接続の流れについて、図35、図38ないし図40を参照しつつ説明する。なお、以下では、図中の右側の挿入穴21に電線を接続する際の様子について説明する。図中の左側の挿入穴21に電線を接続する場合については、左右反対向きである点を除き、作業員の動作は略同様である。 Next, the flow of connecting the electric wire to the connecting device 1e will be described with reference to FIGS. 35, 38 to 40. In the following, a state when the electric wire is connected to the insertion hole 21 on the right side in the drawing will be described. When the electric wire is connected to the insertion hole 21 on the left side in the drawing, the operation of the worker is substantially the same except that the directions are opposite to each other.
 まず、図35に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態から操作部5がケース2の内部に向かって押し込まれ、移動経路24に沿って下方へと移動する。操作部5が押し込まれる際には、例えば、作業員が通常のマイナスドライバー等の先端を、操作部5の上端部51の操作凹部に接触させ、当該マイナスドライバーを介して操作部5に下向きの力を加える。操作部5の下方への移動に従って、弾性部材4は撓んで弾性部材4の形状が変更される。具体的には、図38に示すように、弾性部材4の可動部43が、操作部5の下端部53により下方へと押し下げられ、端子部3から左側へと離間する。これにより、挿入穴21の下端部が開放される。以下の説明では、図38に示す接続機器1eの状態を「挿入穴開放状態」という。 First, the operation unit 5 is pushed toward the inside of the case 2 from the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 35, and moves downward along the movement path 24. When the operation unit 5 is pushed in, for example, a worker brings the tip of a normal flat-blade screwdriver or the like into contact with the operation recess of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5, and points downward to the operation unit 5 via the flat-blade screwdriver. Apply force. As the operation unit 5 moves downward, the elastic member 4 bends and the shape of the elastic member 4 is changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the lower end portion 53 of the operating portion 5, and is separated from the terminal portion 3 to the left side. As a result, the lower end of the insertion hole 21 is opened. In the following description, the state of the connected device 1e shown in FIG. 38 is referred to as an “insertion hole open state”.
 図35に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態から図38に示す挿入穴開放状態への移行時には、弾性部材4の可動部43が操作部5により下方へと押し込まれて湾曲し、可動部43の下端部が可動端係止部23eの傾斜接触面234に接触する。そして、操作部5により可動部43がさらに押し込まれることにより、可動部43の下端部は、傾斜接触面234に沿って略左向きに移動する。可動端係止部23eは、可動部43により押圧されて下向きに弾性変形する。可動部43の下端部と傾斜接触面234との間には、弾性部材4の復元力(すなわち、可動部43を上向きに移動させようとする力)に抗する摩擦抵抗が生じる。 At the time of transition from the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 35 to the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. 38, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is pushed downward by the operating portion 5 and curved, and the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 is bent. It contacts the inclined contact surface 234 of the movable end locking portion 23e. Then, when the movable portion 43 is further pushed by the operating portion 5, the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 moves substantially to the left along the inclined contact surface 234. The movable end locking portion 23e is pressed by the movable portion 43 and elastically deforms downward. A frictional resistance is generated between the lower end of the movable portion 43 and the inclined contact surface 234 against the restoring force of the elastic member 4 (that is, the force for moving the movable portion 43 upward).
 挿入穴開放状態の接続機器1eでは、上記摩擦抵抗が生じることにより、弾性部材4の復元力が、可動端係止部23eの傾斜接触面234により部分的に支持される。したがって、操作部5を下向きに押し込んだ状態で維持するために必要な作業員の力が軽減される。すなわち、接続機器1eでは、弾性部材4の可動部43および傾斜接触面234により、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力を低減させる保持力低減機構60eが構成される。なお、傾斜接触面234により支持される弾性部材4の復元力は、弾性部材4の全復元力よりも小さい。換言すれば、挿入穴開放状態の弾性部材4の復元力は、可動部43と傾斜接触面234との間に生じる摩擦抵抗よりも大きい。したがって、当該摩擦抵抗のみにより、弾性部材4の可動部43が傾斜接触面234に係止されることはない。 In the connecting device 1e with the insertion hole open, the restoring force of the elastic member 4 is partially supported by the inclined contact surface 234 of the movable end locking portion 23e due to the frictional resistance. Therefore, the force of the worker required to maintain the operation unit 5 in the downwardly pushed state is reduced. That is, in the connecting device 1e, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 and the inclined contact surface 234 constitute a holding force reducing mechanism 60e that reduces the force for maintaining the operating portion 5 in the case 2 in a pushed state. The restoring force of the elastic member 4 supported by the inclined contact surface 234 is smaller than the total restoring force of the elastic member 4. In other words, the restoring force of the elastic member 4 in the open insertion hole state is larger than the frictional resistance generated between the movable portion 43 and the inclined contact surface 234. Therefore, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is not locked to the inclined contact surface 234 only by the frictional resistance.
 接続機器1eでは、可動部43の下端部と傾斜接触面234との摩擦により、操作部5を押し込むマイナスドライバーを握る作業員の手に抵抗が生じる。したがって、作業員は、挿入穴閉鎖状態から挿入穴開放状態への移行完了を容易に認識することができる。 In the connected device 1e, the friction between the lower end of the movable portion 43 and the inclined contact surface 234 causes resistance to the hand of the worker holding the flat-blade screwdriver that pushes the operating portion 5. Therefore, the worker can easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state.
 また、接続機器1eでは、可動部43と傾斜接触面234との接触と略同時に、操作部5の上端部51の下端が、ケース2の移動経路24内に設けられた上下方向に略垂直な停止面242に上側から接触する。これにより、操作部5の下方への過剰な移動を制限することができる。また、操作部5の上端部51と停止面242との接触による手応えおよび/または音の発生により、作業員は、挿入穴閉鎖状態から挿入穴開放状態への移行完了をさらに容易に認識することもできる。 Further, in the connected device 1e, at substantially the same time as the contact between the movable portion 43 and the inclined contact surface 234, the lower end of the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5 is substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction provided in the moving path 24 of the case 2. It contacts the stop surface 242 from above. Thereby, it is possible to limit the excessive movement of the operation unit 5 downward. Further, the operator can more easily recognize the completion of the transition from the insertion hole closed state to the insertion hole open state by the response and / or the generation of sound due to the contact between the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 and the stop surface 242. You can also.
 図38に示す挿入穴開放状態では、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部(すなわち、当該領域よりも下側)に位置する。あるいは、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域と略同一平面上に位置していてもよい。操作部5の他の表面についても同様である。換言すれば、図38に示す挿入穴開放状態では、操作部5の表面は、ケース2の表面のうち操作部5の周囲の領域(すなわち、移動経路24の周囲の領域)よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。 In the state where the insertion hole is opened as shown in FIG. 38, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 than the area around the operation unit 5. Located on the side). Alternatively, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 may be located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5. In other words, in the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. 38, the surface of the operation unit 5 is the surface of the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24). It is located inside or substantially on the same plane as the area.
 図38に示す挿入穴開放状態では、弾性部材4は、後述する結線状態の弾性部材4よりも撓んでおり、電線を端子部3との間で挟持しない。換言すれば、図38に示す接続機器1eの状態である挿入穴開放状態は、弾性部材4と端子部3との間の電線の挟持が解除された「非結線状態」である。 In the state where the insertion hole is opened shown in FIG. 38, the elastic member 4 is more bent than the elastic member 4 in the connected state described later, and does not sandwich the electric wire with the terminal portion 3. In other words, the insertion hole open state, which is the state of the connecting device 1e shown in FIG. 38, is a “non-connection state” in which the pinching of the electric wire between the elastic member 4 and the terminal portion 3 is released.
 続いて、弾性部材4が挿入穴開放状態にて維持された状態で、電線91が、図38中に二点鎖線にて示すように接続機器1eの挿入穴21に挿入される。電線91は、例えば単線であってもよく、より線であってもよい。また、電線91は、先端部に棒状圧着端子等が設けられたより線であってもよい。電線91の先端部の直径は、例えば、0.42mm以上であることが好ましい。電線91の先端部の直径は、現実的には、2.3mm以下である。電線91の先端部の直径は、様々に変更されてよい。また、電線91の先端部以外の部位の直径も、様々に変更されてよい。 Subsequently, the electric wire 91 is inserted into the insertion hole 21 of the connecting device 1e as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 38 while the elastic member 4 is maintained in the insertion hole open state. The electric wire 91 may be, for example, a single wire or a stranded wire. Further, the electric wire 91 may be a stranded wire provided with a rod-shaped crimp terminal or the like at the tip end portion. The diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is preferably 0.42 mm or more, for example. The diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 is practically 2.3 mm or less. The diameter of the tip of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways. Further, the diameter of the portion other than the tip end portion of the electric wire 91 may be changed in various ways.
 電線91は、挿入穴21内にて下方へと移動され、図39に示すように、端子部3と挿入穴開放状態の弾性部材4との間に挿入される。その後、操作部5を押し込む作業員の力が弱められ、弾性部材4の復元力が、作業員の力と上記摩擦抵抗(すなわち、可動部43と傾斜接触面234との間に生じる摩擦抵抗)との合計よりも大きくなることにより、弾性部材4の可動部43が右斜め上方へと移動し、傾斜接触面234から上方に離間する。 The electric wire 91 is moved downward in the insertion hole 21 and is inserted between the terminal portion 3 and the elastic member 4 in the insertion hole open state as shown in FIG. 39. After that, the force of the worker pushing the operation unit 5 is weakened, and the restoring force of the elastic member 4 is the force of the worker and the frictional resistance (that is, the frictional resistance generated between the movable part 43 and the inclined contact surface 234). When it becomes larger than the total of, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 moves diagonally upward to the right and is separated upward from the inclined contact surface 234.
 また、可動部43は、図40に示すように、電線91に左側から接触する。弾性部材4の可動部43は、上記復元力により、電線91を端子部3に押し付けて端子部3との間で挟持する。これにより、電線91と端子部3とが電気的かつ機械的に接続される。換言すれば、電線91が接続機器1eに結線される。以下の説明では、図40に示す状態を「結線状態」という。結線状態の弾性部材4は、上述のように、電線91を端子部3との間で挟持している。また、結線状態の弾性部材4では、可動部43は、可動端係止部23eの傾斜接触面234から上方に離間した位置に位置し、傾斜接触面234とは非接触である。 Further, as shown in FIG. 40, the movable portion 43 contacts the electric wire 91 from the left side. The movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3. As a result, the electric wire 91 and the terminal portion 3 are electrically and mechanically connected. In other words, the electric wire 91 is connected to the connecting device 1e. In the following description, the state shown in FIG. 40 is referred to as a “connection state”. As described above, the elastic member 4 in the connected state sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3. Further, in the elastic member 4 in the connected state, the movable portion 43 is located at a position separated upward from the inclined contact surface 234 of the movable end locking portion 23e, and is not in contact with the inclined contact surface 234.
 接続機器1eでは、また、弾性部材4の可動部43の上記右斜め上方への移動により、操作部5は、図39に示す挿入穴開放状態から上方に移動し、下端部53が弾性部材4の可動部43に接触した状態で停止する。 In the connected device 1e, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is moved diagonally upward to the right, so that the operating portion 5 moves upward from the insertion hole open state shown in FIG. Stops in contact with the movable portion 43 of.
 図40に示す結線状態では、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域よりもケース2の内部(すなわち、当該領域よりも下側)に位置する。あるいは、操作部5の上端部51の上面511は、ケース2の上面25のうち操作部5の周囲の領域と略同一平面上に位置していてもよい。操作部5の他の表面についても同様である。換言すれば、図40に示す結線状態では、操作部5の表面は、ケース2の表面のうち操作部5の周囲の領域(すなわち、移動経路24の周囲の領域)よりもケース2の内部に位置し、または、当該領域と略同一平面上に位置する。 In the wiring state shown in FIG. 40, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 (that is, below the area) of the upper surface 25 of the case 2 with respect to the area around the operation unit 5. Located in. Alternatively, the upper surface 511 of the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 may be located on substantially the same plane as the area around the operation unit 5 in the upper surface 25 of the case 2. The same applies to the other surfaces of the operation unit 5. In other words, in the wiring state shown in FIG. 40, the surface of the operation unit 5 is inside the case 2 rather than the area around the operation unit 5 (that is, the area around the movement path 24) in the surface of the case 2. It is located or is located substantially in the same plane as the area.
 なお、図40に示す結線状態において、図40中の上側が重力方向下側となるように接続機器1eが配置されている場合、操作部5は、重力により弾性部材4から図中の上方に離間する。そして、操作部5の操作段差部55が、図35に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態と同様に、ケース2の一部に係止され、操作部5の上方への移動が制限される。したがって、操作部5が図35に示す位置よりも上側へと移動することが防止される。 In the connection state shown in FIG. 40, when the connecting device 1e is arranged so that the upper side in FIG. 40 is the lower side in the direction of gravity, the operation unit 5 is moved upward in the drawing from the elastic member 4 due to gravity. Separate. Then, the operation step portion 55 of the operation portion 5 is locked to a part of the case 2 as in the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 35, and the upward movement of the operation portion 5 is restricted. Therefore, it is prevented that the operation unit 5 moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 35.
 電線91を接続機器1eから取り外す際には、例えば、作業員が通常のマイナスドライバー等の先端を、操作部5の上端部51の操作凹部に接触させ、当該マイナスドライバーを介して操作部5に下向きの力を加える。そして、操作部5を下方に移動し、図39に示すように挿入穴開放状態とする。挿入穴開放状態では、上述のように、弾性部材4は撓んで可動部43が電線91から左側へと離間する。換言すれば、弾性部材4および端子部3による電線91の挟持が解除される。また、弾性部材4の可動部43は、可動端係止部23eの傾斜接触面234に接触し、弾性部材4の復元力の一部が傾斜接触面234により支持される。 When removing the electric wire 91 from the connecting device 1e, for example, a worker brings the tip of a normal flat-blade screwdriver or the like into contact with the operating recess of the upper end portion 51 of the operating portion 5, and the flat-blade screwdriver is used to reach the operating portion 5. Apply a downward force. Then, the operation unit 5 is moved downward to open the insertion hole as shown in FIG. 39. In the state where the insertion hole is open, as described above, the elastic member 4 bends and the movable portion 43 is separated from the electric wire 91 to the left side. In other words, the sandwiching of the electric wire 91 by the elastic member 4 and the terminal portion 3 is released. Further, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 comes into contact with the inclined contact surface 234 of the movable end locking portion 23e, and a part of the restoring force of the elastic member 4 is supported by the inclined contact surface 234.
 このときも、上記と同様に、可動部43の下端部と傾斜接触面234との摩擦に起因する抵抗が生じるため、作業員は、接続機器1eが挿入穴開放状態(すなわち、非結線状態)となったことを容易に認識することができる。また、操作部5の上端部51と停止面242との接触による手応えおよび/または音の発生により、接続機器1eが挿入穴開放状態(すなわち、非結線状態)となったことをさらに容易に認識することができる。 Also at this time, similarly to the above, resistance is generated due to friction between the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 and the inclined contact surface 234, so that the worker can see that the connecting device 1e is in the insertion hole open state (that is, the unconnected state). It can be easily recognized that it has become. Further, it is more easily recognized that the connected device 1e is in the insertion hole open state (that is, the unconnected state) due to the response and / or the generation of sound due to the contact between the upper end portion 51 of the operation unit 5 and the stop surface 242. can do.
 接続機器1eでは、弾性部材4は、図35に示す挿入穴閉鎖状態と、図38および図39に示す挿入穴開放状態と、図40に示す結線状態との間で変形可能である。以下の説明では、図40に示すように、結線状態の弾性部材4に接触する操作部5の位置を「第1位置」と呼ぶ。また、図38および図39に示すように、挿入穴開放状態(すなわち、非結線状態)の弾性部材4に接触する操作部5の位置を「第2位置」と呼ぶ。さらに、図35に示すように、操作段差部55がケース2の一部に係止する操作部5の位置を「第3位置」と呼ぶ。 In the connecting device 1e, the elastic member 4 can be deformed between the insertion hole closed state shown in FIG. 35, the insertion hole open state shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, and the connection state shown in FIG. In the following description, as shown in FIG. 40, the position of the operating portion 5 in contact with the elastic member 4 in the connected state is referred to as a “first position”. Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the position of the operating portion 5 in contact with the elastic member 4 in the insertion hole open state (that is, the non-connection state) is referred to as a “second position”. Further, as shown in FIG. 35, the position of the operation portion 5 in which the operation step portion 55 is locked to a part of the case 2 is referred to as a “third position”.
 上述の移動経路24は、操作部5の第3位置、第1位置および第2位置をこの順に結ぶ。第3位置は、移動経路24において、第1位置を挟んで第2位置とは反対側に位置する。第2位置では、上述のように、弾性部材4の可動部43の下端部が可動端係止部23eの傾斜接触面234に接触する。第3位置では、操作段差部55がケース2の一部に係止することにより、操作部5の上方への移動(すなわち、第2位置から離れる方向への移動)が制限される。なお、第3位置では、操作部5の一部がケース2の一部に係止していればよく、必ずしも操作段差部55がケース2の一部に係止する必要はない。 The above-mentioned movement path 24 connects the third position, the first position, and the second position of the operation unit 5 in this order. The third position is located on the movement path 24 on the opposite side of the first position from the second position. At the second position, as described above, the lower end of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 comes into contact with the inclined contact surface 234 of the movable end locking portion 23e. At the third position, the operation step portion 55 is locked to a part of the case 2, so that the upward movement of the operation portion 5 (that is, the movement in the direction away from the second position) is restricted. At the third position, it is sufficient that a part of the operation unit 5 is locked to a part of the case 2, and the operation step portion 55 does not necessarily have to be locked to a part of the case 2.
 図35に示す例では、傾斜接触面234を有する可動端係止部23eはケース2の一部であるが、傾斜接触面234は必ずしもケース2に設けられる必要はなく、接続機器1eのケース2以外の部位に設けられてもよい。例えば、図41に示すように、端子接続部32の一部が切り起こされて、導電性の可動端係止部23fが形成されてもよい。具体的には、右側の操作部5の下方において、端子接続部32のうち厚さ方向の中央部に位置する略矩形の領域が、左端部を除いて周囲の部位から切り離され、右端部が上方へと移動するように当該領域の左端部が折り曲げられる。これにより、端子接続部32から端子部3に向かって右斜め上方へと延びる可動端係止部23fが形成され、可動端係止部23fの上面が傾斜接触面234fとなる。 In the example shown in FIG. 35, the movable end locking portion 23e having the inclined contact surface 234 is a part of the case 2, but the inclined contact surface 234 does not necessarily have to be provided in the case 2, and the case 2 of the connecting device 1e. It may be provided in a portion other than the above. For example, as shown in FIG. 41, a part of the terminal connecting portion 32 may be cut up to form a conductive movable end locking portion 23f. Specifically, below the operation unit 5 on the right side, a substantially rectangular region of the terminal connection unit 32 located in the central portion in the thickness direction is separated from the surrounding portions except for the left end portion, and the right end portion is The left edge of the region is bent to move upwards. As a result, the movable end locking portion 23f extending diagonally upward to the right from the terminal connecting portion 32 toward the terminal portion 3 is formed, and the upper surface of the movable end locking portion 23f becomes the inclined contact surface 234f.
 この場合も、上記と同様に、操作部5が第1位置に位置する結線状態(図40参照)では、傾斜接触面234fは、弾性部材4の可動部43から下方に離間した位置に位置する。また、図41に示すように、操作部5が第2位置に位置する非結線状態(すなわち、挿入穴開放状態)では、可動部43の下端部が傾斜接触面234fに接触し、可動部43と傾斜接触面234fとの間に、弾性部材4の復元力に抗する摩擦抵抗が生じる。 Also in this case, similarly to the above, in the connection state (see FIG. 40) in which the operating portion 5 is located at the first position, the inclined contact surface 234f is located at a position separated downward from the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 41, in the non-connected state (that is, the insertion hole open state) in which the operating portion 5 is located at the second position, the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 comes into contact with the inclined contact surface 234f, and the movable portion 43 A frictional resistance against the restoring force of the elastic member 4 is generated between the surface and the inclined contact surface 234f.
 以上に説明したように、電線91が接続される接続機器1eは、ケース2と、端子部3と、弾性部材4と、操作部5とを備える。端子部3は、導電性であり、ケース2に固定される。弾性部材4は、ケース2に取り付けられる。弾性部材4は、復元力により電線91を端子部3に押し付けて挟持する。操作部5は、ケース2に設けられた上下方向に延びる移動経路24に沿って移動することにより、弾性部材4の形状を変更する。弾性部材4は、電線91を端子部3との間で挟持している結線状態と、結線状態よりも撓んで端子部3との間の電線91の挟持が解除された非結線状態(すなわち、挿入穴開放状態)との間で変形可能である。操作部5は、第1位置において結線状態の弾性部材4に接触する。操作部5は、弾性部材4との接触状態を維持しつつ、第1位置よりも下側の第2位置へと押し込まれることにより、弾性部材4を非結線状態へと変形させる。接続機器1eは、操作部5が第2位置に位置する状態において、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力を低減させる保持力低減機構60eをさらに備える。これにより、接続機器1eを非結線状態で維持する力を低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1eの操作性を向上することができる。 As described above, the connecting device 1e to which the electric wire 91 is connected includes a case 2, a terminal portion 3, an elastic member 4, and an operating portion 5. The terminal portion 3 is conductive and is fixed to the case 2. The elastic member 4 is attached to the case 2. The elastic member 4 presses the electric wire 91 against the terminal portion 3 by the restoring force and sandwiches the electric wire 91. The operation unit 5 changes the shape of the elastic member 4 by moving along a movement path 24 extending in the vertical direction provided in the case 2. The elastic member 4 is in a connected state in which the electric wire 91 is sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 and a non-connected state in which the electric wire 91 is released from being sandwiched between the terminal portion 3 by being bent more than the connected state (that is,). It can be deformed with the insertion hole open state). The operation unit 5 comes into contact with the elastic member 4 in the connected state at the first position. The operating unit 5 deforms the elastic member 4 into a non-wired state by being pushed into the second position below the first position while maintaining the contact state with the elastic member 4. The connected device 1e further includes a holding force reducing mechanism 60e that reduces the force for maintaining the operating unit 5 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 when the operating unit 5 is located at the second position. As a result, the force for maintaining the connected device 1e in the unconnected state can be reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1e can be improved.
 上述のように、好ましくは、弾性部材4は、ケース2に固定される固定部42と、固定部42から斜め下方に延びる可動部43とを備える。結線状態では、操作部5が可動部43に接触し、可動部43が電線91を端子部3との間で挟持する。非結線状態では、可動部43が結線状態よりも下方に撓む。これにより、接続機器1eの操作性をさらに向上することができる。 As described above, preferably, the elastic member 4 includes a fixed portion 42 fixed to the case 2 and a movable portion 43 extending diagonally downward from the fixed portion 42. In the connected state, the operation unit 5 comes into contact with the movable portion 43, and the movable portion 43 sandwiches the electric wire 91 with the terminal portion 3. In the non-connected state, the movable portion 43 bends downward from the connected state. Thereby, the operability of the connected device 1e can be further improved.
 上述のように、好ましくは、弾性部材4は板バネである。接続機器1eは、傾斜接触面234をさらに備える。傾斜接触面234は、結線状態の弾性部材4の可動部43から下方に離間した位置において、上方に向かうに従って可動部43の下端部に近づく方向へと斜め上方に延びる。保持力低減機構60eは、弾性部材4の可動部43および傾斜接触面234を備える。操作部5が第2位置に位置する状態では、可動部43の下端部が傾斜接触面234に接触し、可動部43と傾斜接触面234との間に、弾性部材4の復元力に抗する摩擦抵抗が生じる。これにより、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力を、簡素な構造によって低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1eの操作性を容易に向上することができる。 As described above, the elastic member 4 is preferably a leaf spring. The connecting device 1e further includes an inclined contact surface 234. The inclined contact surface 234 extends obliquely upward in a direction closer to the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 as it goes upward at a position separated downward from the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 in the connected state. The holding force reducing mechanism 60e includes a movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 and an inclined contact surface 234. In the state where the operating portion 5 is located at the second position, the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 comes into contact with the inclined contact surface 234, and resists the restoring force of the elastic member 4 between the movable portion 43 and the inclined contact surface 234. Friction resistance occurs. As a result, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state) can be reduced by a simple structure. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1e can be easily improved.
 上述のように、非結線状態の弾性部材4の復元力は、好ましくは上述の摩擦抵抗よりも大きい。このため、非結線状態の接続機器1eに電線91を結線する際に、マイナスドライバー等により操作部5を下向きに押す力を緩めることにより、操作部5を第2位置から第1位置へと容易に移動させ、弾性部材4の可動部43と端子部3との間に電線91を容易に挟持させることができる。また、接続機器1eから電線91を抜き取った後、弾性部材4を非結線状態(すなわち、挿入穴開放状態)から挿入穴閉鎖状態へと戻す際にも同様に、マイナスドライバー等により操作部5を下向きに押す力を緩めることにより、操作部5を第2位置から第3位置へと容易に移動させることができる。したがって、電線91の結線の際、あるいは、電線91の結線解除の際に、マイナスドライバー等を移動経路24に繰り返し挿入する必要がないため、接続機器1eの操作性を向上することができる。 As described above, the restoring force of the elastic member 4 in the unconnected state is preferably larger than the frictional resistance described above. Therefore, when connecting the electric wire 91 to the connected device 1e in the unconnected state, the operation unit 5 can be easily moved from the second position to the first position by relaxing the force for pushing the operation unit 5 downward with a flat-blade screwdriver or the like. The electric wire 91 can be easily sandwiched between the movable portion 43 and the terminal portion 3 of the elastic member 4. Further, when the elastic member 4 is returned from the unconnected state (that is, the insertion hole open state) to the insertion hole closed state after the electric wire 91 is pulled out from the connecting device 1e, the operation unit 5 is similarly moved by a flat-blade screwdriver or the like. By loosening the downward pushing force, the operation unit 5 can be easily moved from the second position to the third position. Therefore, it is not necessary to repeatedly insert a flat-blade screwdriver or the like into the movement path 24 when connecting the electric wire 91 or disconnecting the electric wire 91, so that the operability of the connected device 1e can be improved.
 接続機器1eでは、図42に示すように、傾斜接触面234に凹部231が設けられてもよい。当該凹部231には、操作部5が上述の第2位置に位置する状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で、弾性部材4の可動部43の下端部が嵌合する。これにより、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1eの操作性をさらに向上することができる。なお、この場合であっても、操作部5を押し込む力を緩めると、弾性部材4の復元力により、操作部5は上方へと移動し、可動部43は右上方へと移動する。 In the connected device 1e, as shown in FIG. 42, the recess 231 may be provided on the inclined contact surface 234. The lower end of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 is fitted into the recess 231 in a state where the operating portion 5 is located at the above-mentioned second position (that is, in a non-connection state). As a result, the force for maintaining the operation unit 5 in the state of being pushed into the case 2 (that is, the unconnected state) can be further reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1e can be further improved. Even in this case, when the force for pushing the operating portion 5 is relaxed, the operating portion 5 moves upward and the movable portion 43 moves upward to the right due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4.
 接続機器1eでは、図43に太線にて示すように、傾斜接触面234のうち可動部43の下端部と接触する領域に粗面部232が設けられ、可動部43の下端部に粗面部45が設けられてもよい。粗面部232および粗面部45はそれぞれ、周囲の部位よりも表面粗度が大きい領域である。粗面部232と粗面部45とが接触することにより、可動部43と傾斜接触面234との間の摩擦抵抗が増大するため、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。 In the connected device 1e, as shown by a thick line in FIG. 43, a rough surface portion 232 is provided in a region of the inclined contact surface 234 that comes into contact with the lower end portion of the movable portion 43, and the rough surface portion 45 is provided at the lower end portion of the movable portion 43. It may be provided. The rough surface portion 232 and the rough surface portion 45 are regions having a surface roughness larger than that of the surrounding portions, respectively. When the rough surface portion 232 and the rough surface portion 45 come into contact with each other, the frictional resistance between the movable portion 43 and the inclined contact surface 234 increases, so that the force for maintaining the operating portion 5 in the case 2 in the pushed state is further increased. It can be reduced.
 接続機器1eでは、傾斜接触面234のうち可動部43の下端部と接触する領域、または、可動部43の下端部が、粗面部を有していればよい。この場合であっても、可動部43と傾斜接触面234との間の摩擦抵抗が増大するため、操作部5をケース2内に押し込んだ状態(すなわち、非結線状態)で維持する力をさらに低減することができる。その結果、接続機器1eの操作性をさらに向上することができる。なお、当該摩擦抵抗が増大した状態であっても、操作部5を押し込む力を緩めると、弾性部材4の復元力により、操作部5は上方へと移動、可動部43は右上方へと移動する。 In the connected device 1e, it is sufficient that the region of the inclined contact surface 234 that comes into contact with the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 or the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 has a rough surface portion. Even in this case, since the frictional resistance between the movable portion 43 and the inclined contact surface 234 increases, the force for maintaining the operating portion 5 in the case 2 in the pushed state (that is, the unconnected state) is further increased. It can be reduced. As a result, the operability of the connected device 1e can be further improved. Even when the frictional resistance is increased, when the force for pushing the operating portion 5 is relaxed, the operating portion 5 moves upward and the movable portion 43 moves upward due to the restoring force of the elastic member 4. To do.
 上述の接続機器1,1a,1b,1d,1eでは、様々な変更が可能である。 Various changes can be made in the above-mentioned connected devices 1, 1a, 1b, 1d, 1e.
 例えば、接続機器1,1a,1b,1d,1eでは、端子部3、弾性部材4,4bおよび操作部5,5a,5bの形状は様々に変更されてよい。例えば、接続機器1,1a,1dでは、弾性部材4は板バネ以外の部材(例えば、弦巻バネ)であってもよい。 For example, in the connected devices 1, 1a, 1b, 1d, 1e, the shapes of the terminal portion 3, the elastic members 4, 4b, and the operation portions 5, 5a, 5b may be changed in various ways. For example, in the connecting devices 1, 1a, 1d, the elastic member 4 may be a member other than the leaf spring (for example, a string-wound spring).
 接続機器1では、第1位置、第2位置および第3位置に位置する操作部5の表面が、ケース2の表面のうち操作部5の周囲の領域よりも外側に突出していてもよい。接続機器1a,1d,1eにおいても同様である。接続機器1bでは、第1位置、第2位置および第3位置に位置する操作部5bの表面が、ケース2の表面のうち操作部5bの周囲の領域よりも外側に突出していてもよい。 In the connected device 1, the surface of the operation unit 5 located at the first position, the second position, and the third position may protrude outward from the area around the operation unit 5 on the surface of the case 2. The same applies to the connected devices 1a, 1d, and 1e. In the connected device 1b, the surface of the operation unit 5b located at the first position, the second position, and the third position may protrude outward from the area around the operation unit 5b on the surface of the case 2.
 接続機器1では、第2位置に位置する操作部5は、必ずしも、第1位置に位置する操作部5から左右方向に傾斜する必要はなく、第1位置に位置する操作部5と略同様の姿勢であってもよい。接続機器1aにおいても同様である。 In the connected device 1, the operation unit 5 located at the second position does not necessarily have to be inclined in the left-right direction from the operation unit 5 located at the first position, and is substantially the same as the operation unit 5 located at the first position. It may be a posture. The same applies to the connected device 1a.
 接続機器1では、第1傾斜面56および第2傾斜面241に、上述の互いに嵌合する凸部および凹部と、上記粗面部との双方が設けられてもよい。接続機器1aにおいても同様である。 In the connecting device 1, the first inclined surface 56 and the second inclined surface 241 may be provided with both the above-mentioned convex portions and concave portions that are fitted to each other and the above-mentioned rough surface portion. The same applies to the connected device 1a.
 接続機器1bでは、操作部5bの一対の押圧部53bの内側面、および、弾性部材4bの一対の腕部42bに、上述の互いに嵌合する凸部および凹部と、上記粗面部との双方が設けられてもよい。 In the connecting device 1b, both the above-mentioned convex portions and concave portions that are fitted to each other and the above-mentioned rough surface portion are formed on the inner surface of the pair of pressing portions 53b of the operation portion 5b and the pair of arm portions 42b of the elastic member 4b. It may be provided.
 接続機器1dでは、弾性部材4の可動部43、および、一対の押圧部23に、上述の互いに嵌合する凸部および凹部と、上記粗面部との双方が設けられてもよい。 In the connecting device 1d, the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 and the pair of pressing portions 23 may be provided with both the above-mentioned convex portions and concave portions that are fitted to each other and the above-mentioned rough surface portion.
 接続機器1eでは、弾性部材4の可動部43の下端部、および/または、傾斜接触面234に上記粗面部が設けられ、さらに、傾斜接触面234に上記凹部231が設けられてもよい。 In the connecting device 1e, the rough surface portion may be provided on the lower end portion of the movable portion 43 of the elastic member 4 and / or the inclined contact surface 234, and the recessed portion 231 may be provided on the inclined contact surface 234.
 接続機器1では、操作部5における第1傾斜面56の位置、および、ケース2における第2傾斜面241の位置は、様々に変更されてよい。接続機器1aにおいても同様である。 In the connected device 1, the position of the first inclined surface 56 on the operation unit 5 and the position of the second inclined surface 241 on the case 2 may be changed in various ways. The same applies to the connected device 1a.
 上述の接続機器1,1a,1b,1d,1eは、様々な装置において電線を接続するために利用されてよい。例えば、接続機器1,1a,1b,1d,1eは、リレーソケットまたは操作スイッチ等に利用されてよい。 The above-mentioned connecting devices 1, 1a, 1b, 1d, 1e may be used for connecting electric wires in various devices. For example, the connected devices 1, 1a, 1b, 1d, 1e may be used as a relay socket, an operation switch, or the like.
 上記実施の形態および各変形例における構成は、相互に矛盾しない限り適宜組み合わされてよい。 The above-described embodiment and the configurations in each modification may be appropriately combined as long as they do not conflict with each other.
 発明を詳細に描写して説明したが、既述の説明は例示的であって限定的なものではない。したがって、本発明の範囲を逸脱しない限り、多数の変形や態様が可能であるといえる。 Although the invention has been described in detail, the above description is exemplary and not limited. Therefore, it can be said that many modifications and modes are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.
 1,1a,1b,1d,1e  接続機器
 2  ケース
 3  端子部
 4,4b,4c  弾性部材
 5,5a,5b  操作部
 23  押圧部
 24  移動経路
 41  中央部
 42  固定部
 42b  腕部
 43  可動部
 44  凸部
 45  粗面部
 51  (操作部の)上端部
 53b  押圧部
 56,56a  第1傾斜面
 60,60a,60b,60d,60e  保持力低減機構
 91  電線
 231  凹部
 232  粗面部
 234,234f  傾斜接触面
 241,241a  第2傾斜面
 243  凹部
 244  粗面部
 421  凹部
 422  粗面部
 531  凸部
 532  粗面部
 561  凸部
 562  粗面部
1,1a, 1b, 1d, 1e Connected equipment 2 Case 3 Terminal part 4,4b, 4c Elastic member 5,5a, 5b Operation part 23 Pressing part 24 Movement path 41 Central part 42 Fixed part 42b Arm part 43 Movable part 44 Convex Part 45 Rough surface part 51 (Operating part) Upper end part 53b Pressing part 56, 56a First inclined surface 60, 60a, 60b, 60d, 60e Holding force reduction mechanism 91 Electric wire 231 Recessed surface 232 Rough surface part 234, 234f Inclined contact surface 241, 241a 2nd inclined surface 243 concave part 244 rough surface part 421 concave part 422 rough surface part 531 convex part 532 rough surface part 561 convex part 562 rough surface part

Claims (24)

  1.  電線が接続される接続機器であって、
     ケースと、
     前記ケースに固定された導電性の端子部と、
     前記ケースに取り付けられ、復元力により電線を前記端子部に押し付けて挟持する弾性部材と、
     前記ケースに設けられた上下方向に延びる移動経路に沿って移動することにより前記弾性部材の形状を変更する操作部と、
    を備え、
     前記弾性部材は、前記電線を前記端子部との間で挟持している結線状態と、前記結線状態よりも撓んで前記端子部との間の前記電線の挟持が解除された非結線状態との間で変形可能であり、
     前記操作部は、第1位置において前記結線状態の前記弾性部材に接触し、前記弾性部材との接触状態を維持しつつ前記第1位置よりも下側の第2位置へと押し込まれることにより、前記弾性部材を前記非結線状態へと変形させ、
     前記接続機器は、前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態において、前記操作部を前記ケース内に押し込んだ状態で維持する力を低減させる保持力低減機構をさらに備える。
    It is a connecting device to which electric wires are connected.
    With the case
    The conductive terminal part fixed to the case and
    An elastic member that is attached to the case and holds the electric wire by pressing it against the terminal portion by restoring force.
    An operation unit that changes the shape of the elastic member by moving along a movement path extending in the vertical direction provided in the case.
    With
    The elastic member has a connection state in which the electric wire is sandwiched between the electric wire and the terminal portion and a non-connection state in which the electric wire is released from being sandwiched between the terminal portion by bending more than the connection state. Can be transformed between
    The operating portion comes into contact with the elastic member in the connected state at the first position, and is pushed to the second position below the first position while maintaining the contact state with the elastic member. The elastic member is deformed into the unconnected state,
    The connected device further includes a holding force reducing mechanism that reduces the force for maintaining the operating unit in a state of being pushed into the case when the operating unit is located at the second position.
  2.  請求項1に記載の接続機器であって、
     前記操作部は、下方に向かうに従って前記移動経路の中心線から離れる方向に傾斜する第1傾斜面を有し、
     前記ケースは、前記移動経路内において前記第1傾斜面と平行に上下方向に対して傾斜する第2傾斜面を有し、
     前記保持力低減機構は、前記第1傾斜面および前記第2傾斜面を備え、
     前記操作部が前記第1位置に位置する状態では、前記第1傾斜面は前記第2傾斜面から上側に離間した位置に位置し、
     前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態では、前記第1傾斜面は前記第2傾斜面に下側から当接する。
    The connected device according to claim 1.
    The operation unit has a first inclined surface that inclines in a direction away from the center line of the moving path toward the bottom.
    The case has a second inclined surface that is inclined in the vertical direction in parallel with the first inclined surface in the movement path.
    The holding force reducing mechanism includes the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface.
    In the state where the operation unit is located at the first position, the first inclined surface is located at a position separated upward from the second inclined surface.
    In the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the first inclined surface comes into contact with the second inclined surface from below.
  3.  請求項2に記載の接続機器であって、
     前記非結線状態の前記弾性部材の復元力により、前記第1傾斜面が前記第2傾斜面に対して上向きに押圧され、
     前記第2傾斜面は、前記弾性部材の復元力を部分的に支持する。
    The connected device according to claim 2.
    The restoring force of the elastic member in the unconnected state presses the first inclined surface upward with respect to the second inclined surface.
    The second inclined surface partially supports the restoring force of the elastic member.
  4.  請求項2または3に記載の接続機器であって、
     前記第1傾斜面は、前記操作部の上端に設けられる。
    The connected device according to claim 2 or 3.
    The first inclined surface is provided at the upper end of the operating portion.
  5.  請求項2または3に記載の接続機器であって、
     前記第1傾斜面は、前記操作部の上端部よりも下側に設けられる。
    The connected device according to claim 2 or 3.
    The first inclined surface is provided below the upper end portion of the operating portion.
  6.  請求項2ないし5のいずれか1つに記載の接続機器であって、
     前記第1傾斜面および前記第2傾斜面のうち一方の面が凸部を有し、
     前記第1傾斜面および前記第2傾斜面のうち他方の面が、前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態で前記凸部と嵌合する凹部を有する。
    The connected device according to any one of claims 2 to 5.
    One of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface has a convex portion and has a convex portion.
    The other surface of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface has a concave portion that fits with the convex portion in a state where the operating portion is located at the second position.
  7.  請求項2ないし6のいずれか1つに記載の接続機器であって、
     前記第1傾斜面および前記第2傾斜面のうち少なくとも一方の面が粗面部を有する。
    The connected device according to any one of claims 2 to 6.
    At least one of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface has a rough surface portion.
  8.  請求項2ないし7のいずれか1つに記載の接続機器であって、
     前記弾性部材が板バネである。
    The connected device according to any one of claims 2 to 7.
    The elastic member is a leaf spring.
  9.  請求項1に記載の接続機器であって、
     前記弾性部材は、
     上端に位置する折り曲げ部と、
     前記折り曲げ部の左右両側において下方に延びるとともに下方に向かうに従って左右方向の間隔が大きくなる一対の腕部と、
    を備える板バネであり、
     前記操作部は、左右方向に離間して配置されて上下方向に延びるとともに、上方に向かうに従って左右方向の間隔が小さくなる、または、左右方向の間隔が一定な一対の押圧部を備え、
     前記保持力低減機構は、前記一対の腕部および前記一対の押圧部を備え、
     前記操作部が前記第1位置に位置する状態では、前記一対の押圧部のうち少なくとも一方の下端部が前記一対の腕部のうち少なくとも一方の外側面に接触し、
     前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態では、前記一対の腕部が左右方向において互いに近づく方向に撓んだ状態で前記一対の押圧部の間に挟持される。
    The connected device according to claim 1.
    The elastic member is
    The bent part located at the upper end and
    A pair of arms extending downward on both left and right sides of the bent portion and increasing the distance in the left-right direction toward the downward direction
    It is a leaf spring equipped with
    The operation unit is provided with a pair of pressing units that are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction and extend in the vertical direction, and the distance in the left-right direction becomes smaller or the distance in the left-right direction is constant toward the upper side.
    The holding force reducing mechanism includes the pair of arms and the pair of pressing portions.
    In the state where the operating portion is located at the first position, at least one lower end portion of the pair of pressing portions comes into contact with the outer surface of at least one of the pair of arm portions.
    In the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the pair of arm portions are sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions in a state of being bent in a direction approaching each other in the left-right direction.
  10.  請求項9に記載の接続機器であって、
     前記非結線状態の前記弾性部材の復元力により、前記一対の押圧部の内側面が前記一対の腕部により左右方向に押圧され、
     前記一対の押圧部は、前記弾性部材の復元力を部分的に支持する。
    The connected device according to claim 9.
    Due to the restoring force of the elastic member in the unconnected state, the inner surfaces of the pair of pressing portions are pressed in the left-right direction by the pair of arms.
    The pair of pressing portions partially support the restoring force of the elastic member.
  11.  請求項9または10に記載の接続機器であって、
     前記一対の押圧部および前記一対の腕部のうち一方が凸部を有し、
     前記一対の押圧部および前記一対の腕部のうち他方が、前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態で前記凸部と嵌合する凹部を有する。
    The connected device according to claim 9 or 10.
    One of the pair of pressing portions and the pair of arms has a convex portion,
    The other of the pair of pressing portions and the pair of arm portions has a concave portion that fits with the convex portion in a state where the operating portion is located at the second position.
  12.  請求項9ないし11のいずれか1つに記載の接続機器であって、
     前記一対の押圧部の内側面、および、前記一対の腕部の前記外側面のうち少なくとも一方の面が粗面部を有する。
    The connected device according to any one of claims 9 to 11.
    At least one of the inner side surfaces of the pair of pressing portions and the outer surfaces of the pair of arm portions has a rough surface portion.
  13.  請求項9ないし12のいずれか1つに記載の接続機器であって、
     前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態では、前記一対の腕部の成す角度は、0°よりも大きくかつ180°よりも小さい。
    The connected device according to any one of claims 9 to 12.
    In the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the angle formed by the pair of arms is larger than 0 ° and smaller than 180 °.
  14.  請求項9ないし13のいずれか1つに記載の接続機器であって、
     前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態では、前記一対の腕部の下端は、前記一対の押圧部の下端よりも下側に位置する。
    The connected device according to any one of claims 9 to 13.
    In the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the lower ends of the pair of arms are located below the lower ends of the pair of pressing portions.
  15.  請求項1に記載の接続機器であって、
     前記弾性部材は、
     前記ケースに固定される固定部と、
     前記固定部から斜め下方に延びる可動部と、
    を備え、
     前記結線状態では、前記操作部が前記可動部に接触し、前記可動部が前記電線を前記端子部との間で挟持し、
     前記非結線状態では、前記可動部が前記結線状態よりも下方に撓む。
    The connected device according to claim 1.
    The elastic member is
    The fixing part fixed to the case and
    A movable part extending diagonally downward from the fixed part,
    With
    In the connection state, the operating portion contacts the movable portion, and the movable portion sandwiches the electric wire between the terminal portion and the movable portion.
    In the unconnected state, the movable portion bends downward from the connected state.
  16.  請求項15に記載の接続機器であって、
     前記ケースは、前記結線状態の前記弾性部材の前記可動部の下方において、前記可動部の可動領域に垂直な厚さ方向に離間して配置されて上下方向に延びるとともに、下方に向かうに従って厚さ方向の間隔が小さくなる一対の押圧部を備え、
     前記保持力低減機構は、前記弾性部材の前記可動部および前記一対の押圧部を備え、
     前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態では、前記可動部が前記一対の押圧部の間に挟持され、前記可動部と前記一対の押圧部との間に、前記弾性部材の復元力に抗する摩擦抵抗が生じる。
    The connected device according to claim 15.
    The case is arranged below the movable portion of the elastic member in the connected state at a distance in the thickness direction perpendicular to the movable region of the movable portion, extends in the vertical direction, and becomes thicker as it goes downward. Equipped with a pair of pressing parts that reduce the distance between directions
    The holding force reducing mechanism includes the movable portion of the elastic member and the pair of pressing portions.
    In the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the movable portion is sandwiched between the pair of pressing portions, and the restoring force of the elastic member is applied between the movable portion and the pair of pressing portions. Friction resistance to resist occurs.
  17.  請求項16に記載の接続機器であって、
     前記非結線状態の前記弾性部材の復元力は前記摩擦抵抗よりも大きい。
    The connected device according to claim 16.
    The restoring force of the elastic member in the unconnected state is larger than the frictional resistance.
  18.  請求項16または17に記載の接続機器であって、
     前記可動部および前記一対の押圧部のうち一方が凸部を有し、
     前記可動部および前記一対の押圧部のうち他方が、前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態で前記凸部と嵌合する凹部を有する。
    The connected device according to claim 16 or 17.
    One of the movable portion and the pair of pressing portions has a convex portion,
    The other of the movable portion and the pair of pressing portions has a concave portion that fits with the convex portion in a state where the operating portion is located at the second position.
  19.  請求項16ないし18のいずれか1つに記載の接続機器であって、
     前記一対の押圧部の内側面、および、厚さ方向における前記可動部の両側面のうち、少なくとも一の面が粗面部を有する。
    The connected device according to any one of claims 16 to 18.
    At least one of the inner side surfaces of the pair of pressing portions and both side surfaces of the movable portion in the thickness direction has a rough surface portion.
  20.  請求項16ないし19のいずれか1つに記載の接続機器であって、
     前記弾性部材が板バネである。
    The connected device according to any one of claims 16 to 19.
    The elastic member is a leaf spring.
  21.  請求項15に記載の接続機器であって、
     前記弾性部材は板バネであり、
     前記接続機器は、前記結線状態の前記弾性部材の前記可動部から下方に離間した位置において、上方に向かうに従って前記可動部の下端部に近づく方向へと斜め上方に延びる傾斜接触面をさらに備え、
     前記保持力低減機構は、前記弾性部材の前記可動部および前記傾斜接触面を備え、
     前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態では、前記可動部の前記下端部が前記傾斜接触面に接触し、前記可動部と前記傾斜接触面との間に、前記弾性部材の復元力に抗する摩擦抵抗が生じる。
    The connected device according to claim 15.
    The elastic member is a leaf spring.
    The connecting device further includes an inclined contact surface that extends diagonally upward toward the lower end of the movable portion at a position separated downward from the movable portion of the elastic member in the connected state.
    The holding force reducing mechanism includes the movable portion of the elastic member and the inclined contact surface.
    In the state where the operating portion is located at the second position, the lower end portion of the movable portion comes into contact with the inclined contact surface, and the restoring force of the elastic member is applied between the movable portion and the inclined contact surface. Friction resistance to resist occurs.
  22.  請求項21に記載の接続機器であって、
     前記非結線状態の前記弾性部材の復元力は前記摩擦抵抗よりも大きい。
    The connected device according to claim 21.
    The restoring force of the elastic member in the unconnected state is larger than the frictional resistance.
  23.  請求項21または22に記載の接続機器であって、
     前記傾斜接触面が凹部を有し、
     前記操作部が前記第2位置に位置する状態で前記可動部の前記下端部が前記凹部と嵌合する。
    The connected device according to claim 21 or 22.
    The inclined contact surface has a recess,
    The lower end of the movable portion fits with the recess in a state where the operating portion is located at the second position.
  24.  請求項21ないし23のいずれか1つに記載の接続機器であって、
     前記傾斜接触面のうち前記可動部の前記下端部と接触する領域、または、前記可動部の前記下端部は、粗面部を有する。
    The connected device according to any one of claims 21 to 23.
    The region of the inclined contact surface that comes into contact with the lower end portion of the movable portion, or the lower end portion of the movable portion has a rough surface portion.
PCT/JP2020/016273 2019-04-25 2020-04-13 Connection device WO2020218057A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019084138A JP2020181716A (en) 2019-04-25 2019-04-25 Connection device
JP2019-084137 2019-04-25
JP2019-084136 2019-04-25
JP2019084137A JP2020181715A (en) 2019-04-25 2019-04-25 Connection device
JP2019084136A JP2020181714A (en) 2019-04-25 2019-04-25 Connection device
JP2019-084135 2019-04-25
JP2019084135A JP7368100B2 (en) 2019-04-25 2019-04-25 Connected equipment
JP2019-084138 2019-04-25

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020218057A1 true WO2020218057A1 (en) 2020-10-29

Family

ID=72942653

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/016273 WO2020218057A1 (en) 2019-04-25 2020-04-13 Connection device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2020218057A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI829071B (en) * 2021-02-26 2024-01-11 日商歐姆龍股份有限公司 Screw retention structures, terminal blocks and electrical equipment

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004063163A (en) * 2002-07-26 2004-02-26 Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Quick-connection terminal device
WO2017207429A2 (en) * 2016-05-30 2017-12-07 Weidmüller Interface GmbH & Co. KG Spring terminal for a conductor
JP2018116773A (en) * 2017-01-16 2018-07-26 Idec株式会社 Connection device
WO2018221312A1 (en) * 2017-05-29 2018-12-06 Idec株式会社 Connection device

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004063163A (en) * 2002-07-26 2004-02-26 Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Quick-connection terminal device
WO2017207429A2 (en) * 2016-05-30 2017-12-07 Weidmüller Interface GmbH & Co. KG Spring terminal for a conductor
JP2018116773A (en) * 2017-01-16 2018-07-26 Idec株式会社 Connection device
WO2018221312A1 (en) * 2017-05-29 2018-12-06 Idec株式会社 Connection device

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI829071B (en) * 2021-02-26 2024-01-11 日商歐姆龍股份有限公司 Screw retention structures, terminal blocks and electrical equipment

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN110663139B (en) Connecting device
US10193244B2 (en) Push-in clamp retainer, push-in clamp assembly and electric connector element
TWI604675B (en) Electrical connection terminal
JP2000048874A (en) Terminal box
TWI442633B (en) Connector
US7399190B2 (en) Connecting device
JP2002198112A (en) Electrical connector
EP3407428B1 (en) Metal leaf spring structure of electrical connection terminal
JP4291341B2 (en) Connected device
WO2020218057A1 (en) Connection device
EP1349240B1 (en) Connector in which movement of contact portion of contact is guided by insulator
WO2020209027A1 (en) Connector, connection structure, and connection method
JP6648046B2 (en) Connected equipment
WO2019176661A1 (en) Terminal block
JP2020181714A (en) Connection device
JP3812937B2 (en) connector
JP6988848B2 (en) Terminal block
JP2020181716A (en) Connection device
TWI442636B (en) Connector
JP2020181713A (en) Connection device
WO2021106546A1 (en) Press-fit terminal, substrate with press-fit terminal, and device
JP2020181715A (en) Connection device
JP6687260B1 (en) connector
JP3952877B2 (en) Relay terminal block
JP6723567B2 (en) connector

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20795011

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20795011

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1